Yamaha HTR-6030BL Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: HTR-6030BL

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

HTR-6030

HTR-6030

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

01EN_HTR-6030_U_cv-1.fm Page 1 Tuesday, December 19, 2006 11:00 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Caution-i En

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may

cause the product and cart combination to

overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

Important safety instructions

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

Important safety instructions

Caution-ii En

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides

guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies

that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding

system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as

practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

Caution-iii En

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha

will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit

in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from

the wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet.

Voltages are 110–120/220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

Caution: Read this before operating your unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even

if this unit itself is turned off by STANDBY/ON. This

state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit

is designed to consume a very small quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

1 En

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

English

Features ................................................................... 2

Getting started ........................................................ 3

Quick start guide .................................................... 4

Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4

Step 1: Set up your speakers ...................................... 5

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components............................................ 6

Step 3: Turn on the power and

press SCENE 1 button ........................................... 8

What do you want to do with this unit?..................... 9

Connections ........................................................... 10

Rear panel ................................................................ 10

Placing speakers....................................................... 11

Connecting speakers ................................................ 12

Setting the speaker impedance

(U.S.A. and Canada models only) ....................... 13

Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 14

Connecting video components................................. 15

Connecting audio components................................. 17

Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 18

Connecting the power cable..................................... 18

Turning on and off the power .................................. 18

Front panel display .................................................. 19

Basic setup ............................................................. 21

Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 23

Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 23

Creating your original SCENE templates................ 26

Playback ................................................................ 27

Basic operations....................................................... 27

Additional operations............................................... 28

Sound field programs ........................................... 31

Sound field program descriptions ............................ 31

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 34

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 34

Manual tuning .......................................................... 34

Automatic preset tuning........................................... 35

Manual preset tuning ............................................... 35

Selecting preset stations........................................... 36

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 36

XM Satellite Radio tuning ................................... 37

Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock .................... 37

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 38

Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 38

Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............ 40

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 41

Recording .............................................................. 42

Set menu .................................................................43

Using set menu ........................................................ 44

1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 45

2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 48

3 OPTION MENU................................................... 50

Remote control features........................................51

Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 51

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 52

Setting remote control codes ................................... 54

Advanced setup......................................................55

Troubleshooting.....................................................56

Glossary..................................................................61

Specifications .........................................................63

Index .......................................................................64

(at the end of this manual)

Front panel................................................................i

Remote control ....................................................... ii

List of remote control codes ................................. iii

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

APPENDIX

About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the

buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote

control. In case the button names differ between the front

panel and the remote control, the button name on the

remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and

specifications are subject to change in part as a result of

improvements, etc. In case of differences between the

manual and product, the product has priority.

•“

STANDBY/ON” or “

MULTI CH IN” (example)

indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the

remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the top pages

of this manual for the information about each position of

the parts.

•

The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the

corresponding reference page(s).

Features

2 En

Built-in 5-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

Front: 100 W + 100 W

Center: 100 W

Surround: 100 W + 100 W

[Other models]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)

Front: 100 W + 100 W

Center: 100 W

Surround: 100 W + 100 W

SCENE select function

◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations

◆ 4 original SCENE templates for customizing capability

Decoders and DSP circuits

◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of multi-

channel surround sound

◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound

quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to

that of a high-quality stereo

◆ Dolby Digital decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder

◆ DTS decoder

◆ Neural Surround decoder

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

™

Sophisticated FM/AM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

XM Satellite Radio

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM Mini-

Tuner Dock” sold separately)

◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the XM HD content of

XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in

a full surround sound experience

Other features

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input

◆ Component video input/output capability

(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Cinema and music night listening modes

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of

DTS, Inc.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM

Satellite Radio Inc.

Neural Surround

™

name and related logos are trademarks owned

by Neural Audio Corporation.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound

come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your

sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, Ya m aha and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

Features

Getting started

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

■ Checking the supplied accessories

Check that you received all of the following parts.

The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the

models.

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

Select the switch position (upper or lower)

according to your local voltage using a straight

slot screwdriver.

Voltages are 110-120/220-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

■ Installing batteries in the remote control

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries

(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following condition:

– the operation range of the remote control decreases.

• Do not use an old battery and a new one together.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control

code.

Getting started

Note

Caution

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE

plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.

Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may

cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire

hazard.

REC

SUR.DECODE NIGHT

STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP MUTE

MULTI CH IN

POWER

4321

ENT.

DVD

V-AUX XM

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R

TUNER

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

Remote control

Batteries (2)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop antenna

110V-

120V

220V-

240V

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

Notes

Quick start guide

4 En

The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy

DVD movie playback in your home theater.

In these steps, you need the following supplied

accessories.

❏ Indoor FM antenna

❏ AM loop antenna

The following items are not included in the package of this

unit.

❏ Speakers

❏ Front speakers ...................................... 2

❏ Center speaker ...................................... 1

❏ Surround speakers ............................... 2

Select magnetically shielded speakers. The

minimum required speakers are two front speakers.

❏ Active subwoofer ...................................... 1

Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA

input jack.

❏ Speaker cables .......................................... 5

❏ Subwoofer cable ........................................ 1

Select a monaural RCA cable.

❏ DVD player ................................................. 1

Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital

audio output jack and composite video output

jack.

❏ Video monitor ............................................. 1

Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector

equipped with a composite video input jack.

❏ Video cable ................................................ 1

Select an RCA composite video cable.

❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................... 1

Quick start guide

Front right

speaker

Subwoofer

Surround left

speaker

Front left

speaker

Surround right

speaker

Center speaker

Video monitor

DVD player

Enjoy DVD playback!

Step 1: Set up your speakers

☞

P. 5

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

Step 3: Turn on the power and

press SCENE 1 button

☞

P. 6

☞

P. 8

Preparation: Check the items

Quick start guide

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this

unit.

1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the

room.

2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker.

Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with

a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped

(grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of

your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–”

(black) terminals.

3 Connect each speaker cable to the

corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.

1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are

unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables

together to prevent short circuits.

3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.

4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal

part of this unit.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel

(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.

Front speakers

Center and surround speakers

4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the input

jack of the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT jack of this unit.

Step 1: Set up your speakers

MULTI CH INPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

ANTENNA

SPEAKERS

LR LR

SURROUND CENTER FRONT B

AUDIO OUTPUT

DVD

DTV/CBL

SUB

FER

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUNDFRONT

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DTV/

CBL

DVD

DTV/CBL DVR

DVD DVR

FRONT A

GND

IN OUT

DTV/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

MD/

D-R

(REC)

(PL

AY)

12 3 4

To the front right

speaker

Front left speaker

Loosen Insert Tighten

To the surround

left speaker

To the center

speaker

To the surround

right speaker

Press down

Insert

Release

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

MD/

CD-R

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT jack

Subwoofer cable

Input jack

AV receiverSubwoofer

Quick start guide

6 En

1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the

digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD

player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL

jack of this unit.

2 Connect the video cable to the composite

video output jack of your DVD player and the

DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.

3 Connect the video cable to the video input

jack of your video monitor and the VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.

Step 2: Connect your DVD player

and other components

MULTI CH INPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

ANTENNA

SPEAKERS

LR LR

SURROUND CENTER FRONT B

AUDIO OUTPUT

DVD

DTV/CBL

SUB

FER

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUNDFRONT

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DTV/

CBL

DVD

DTV/CBL DVR

DVD DVR

FRONT A

GND

IN OUT

DTV/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

MD/

CD-R

(REC)

(PLAY)

Make sure that this unit and the DVD

player are unplugged from the AC wall

outlets.

Digital coaxial

audio output

jack

Digital coaxial audio

cable

DVD DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL jack

DVD player

AV receiver

Composite video

output jack

Video cable

DVD VIDEO jack

DVD player

AV receiver

L/MONO

AUDIO AUDIO

COLOR STREAM HD

VIDEO

VIDEO-1 IN IN

S-VIDEO

RYP

RL/MONO

Video monitor AV receiver

Video input

jack

Video cable

VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jack

Quick start guide

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

4 Connect the FM and AM antennas to this

unit.

See page 18 for the details.

The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and

you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal.

5 Connect the power plug of this unit and other

components into the AC wall outlet.

Indoor FM antenna

AM loop antenna

Press and hold Insert Release

■ For further connections

• Using the other kind of speaker

combinations

☞

P. 11

• Connecting a video monitor and

DVD player

☞

P. 15

• Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner and

DVD recorder

☞

P. 15

• Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks

☞

P. 16

• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front

panel

☞

P. 16

• Connecting a CD player and an MD

recorder

☞

P. 17

• Connecting a DVD player via analog

multi-channel audio connection

☞

P. 17

• Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna

☞

P. 18

• Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock

☞

P. 37

Quick start guide

8 En

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press

STANDBY/ON on the front panel.

3 Press

SCENE 1.

“DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display,

and this unit automatically optimize own status for

the DVD playback.

The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while

this unit is in the SCENE mode.

4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your

player.

5 Rotate

VOLUME to adjust the volume.

When you change the input source or sound field program, the

SCENE mode is deactivated and the indicator on the SCENE

button turns off.

■ Using the other SCENE buttons

In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding

SCENE button to enjoy playback of the desired sources.

Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the

connected DVD player as the back ground

music for this room...”

Press

SCENE 2 (or

SCENE 2) to select “Disc

Listening”.

Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...”

Press

SCENE 3 (or

SCENE 3) to select “TV

Viewing”.

To use the “TV Viewing” template, you must connect a

cable TV or satellite tuner to this unit in advance. See

page 15 for details.

Step 3: Turn on the power and

press SCENE 1 button

Check the type of the connected speakers.

If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to

“6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 13).

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

FM / AM A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

A / B / C / D / E MEMORY

MEMORY

DISPLAY

TUNING AUTO/MAN'L

Note

Quick start guide

9 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Case C: “I want to listen to a music program from

the FM radio station...”

Press

SCENE 4 (or

SCENE 4) to select “Radio

Listening”.

• To use the “Radio Listening” template, you must tune into

the desired radio station in advance. See pages 34 to 36 for

tuning information.

• To achieve the best possible reception, orient the

connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the

end of the indoor FM antenna.

If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change

the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See

page 23 for details.

■ After using this unit...

Press

STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set

this unit to the standby mode.

This unit is set to the standby mode. In the standby mode,

this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to

receive infrared signals from the remote control. To turn

on this unit from the standby mode, press

STANDBY/

ON (or

POWER) on the front panel. See page 18 for

details.

In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power

in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control.

Notes

Note

What do you want to do with this

unit?

■ Customizing the SCENE templates

• Using various SCENE templates

☞

P. 23

■ Using various input sources

• Basic controls of this unit

☞

P. 27

• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs

☞

P. 34

• Enjoying XM Satellite Radio programs

☞

P. 37

■ Using various sound features

• Using various sound field programs

☞

P. 31

■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit

• Optimizing the speaker parameters for your

listening room (BASIC SETUP)

☞

P. 21

• Manually adjusting various parameters of

this unit

☞

P. 43

• Setting the remote control

☞

P. 51

• Adjusts the advanced parameters

☞

P. 55

■ Additional features

Automatically turning off this unit

☞

P. 30

Connections

10 En

1 XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

See page 37 for connection information.

2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

See page 16 for connection information.

3 VIDEO jacks

See pages 15 for connection information.

4 ANTENNA terminals

See page 18 for connection information.

5 SPEAKERS terminals

See page 12 for connection information.

6 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

See page 17 for connection information.

7 MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 17 for connection information.

8 AUDIO jacks

See pages 15 and 17 for connection information.

9 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack

See page 12 for connection information.

0 VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

See page 3 for details.

Connections

Rear panel

MULTI CH INPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

ANTENNA

SPEAKERS

SURROUND CENTER FRONT B

AUDIO OUTPUT

DVD

/CBL

OOF

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUNDFRONT

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DTV/

CBL

DVD

DTV/CBL DVR

DVD DVR

FRONT A

GND

IN OUT

DTV/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CD-R

(

)

(PLAY)

6 7 8 9 0

1 3 4 5

(U.S.A. model)

11 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-

channel audio sources.

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the

ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a

center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.

Subwoofer (SW)

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction

of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is

not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front

speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.

Placing speakers

60˚

30˚

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

12 En

Connections

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.

■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS

terminal

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.

Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)

terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain

cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation

from the end of each speaker cable and then

twist the bare wires of the cable together to

prevent short circuits.

Connecting speakers

Caution

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 13).

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage

this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the

speakers away from the monitor.

MULTI CH INPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

ANTENNA

SPEAKERS

LR LR

SURROUND CENTER FRONT B

AUDIO OUTPUT

DVD

/CBL

OOF

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUNDFRONT

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DTV/

CBL

DVD

DTV/CBL DVR

DVD DVR

FRONT A

GND

IN OUT

DTV/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CD-R

(

)

(PLAY

)

Subwoofer

Center

speaker

Front speakers (B)

LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front speakers (A)

LeftRight

(U.S.A. model)

10 mm (3/8”)

13 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

■ Connecting to the FRONT A terminals

1 Loosen the knob.

2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into

the hole on the terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

Connecting the banana plug

(except Europe, Korea and Asia models)

The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector

widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the

knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the

end of the corresponding terminal.

■ Connecting to the FRONT B, CENTER,

and SURROUND terminals

1 Press down the tab.

2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into

the hole on the terminal.

3 Release the tab to secure the wire.

1 Make sure this unit is turned off.

See page 18 for details about turning on or off this

unit.

2 Press and hold

TONE CONTROL and

then press

STANDBY/ON to turn on this

unit.

This unit turns on, an the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to

select “SP IMP.”.

The following display appears in the front panel

display.

4 Press

STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “6Ω

MIN”.

The following display appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press

STANDBY/ON to confirm your

selection and set this unit to the standby

mode.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Setting the speaker impedance

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Caution

If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω

MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit.

Note

SP IMP.- 8 MIN

SP IMP.- 6 MIN

14 En

Connections

■ Audio jacks

This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other

components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. All digital input jacks are compatible with

digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency.

• This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the

analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the

fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not

using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This

cap protects the jack from dust.

■ Video jacks

This unit has two types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your video

monitor.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y)

and chrominance (P

B, PR) video signals transmitted on

separate wires of component video cables.

Information on jacks and cable plugs

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y P

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

Composite

video cable

plug

Component

video cable

plugs

Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs

(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)

Notes

Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

COMPONENT

VIDEO

15 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Connect the video components as follows.

You can also connect a video monitor, DVD player, digital TV,

and cable TV to this unit using the COMPONENT VIDEO

connection (see page 16).

■ Connecting a video monitor and a DVD

player

■ Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner

and a DVD recorder

Connecting video components

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

MULTI CH INPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

DVD

DTV/CBL

OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUNDFRONT

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DTV/

CBL

DVD

DTV/CBL DVR

DVD DVR

IN OUT

DTV/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DVD player

Video monitor

Video in

Video out

Audio out

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

MULTI CH INPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

DVD

DTV/CBL

OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUNDFRONT

DVD

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DTV/

CBL

DVD

DTV/CBL DVR

DVD DVR

IN OUT

DTV/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

VVV

Cable TV or

Satellite tuner

DVD recorder

Audio out

Video out

Audio out

Audio in

Audio out

Video in

Video out

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

16 En

Connections

■ Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks

You can enjoy high-quality pictures by connecting your

video monitor and video source components to this unit

using COMPONENT VIDEO connection.

Be sure to connect your video source components in the same

way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if

you connect your video monitor to this unit using a

COMPONENT VIDEO connection, connect your video source

components to this unit using the COMPONENT VIDEO

connection.

■ Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on

the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a

game console or a video camera to this unit.

• To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select

“V-AUX” as the input source.

• The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take

priority over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks.

Note

MULTI CH INPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUNDFRONT

DVD

DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR

OUT

DVD player

Video monitor

Video out

Video in

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

DVD recorder

Caution

Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other

components before making connections.

Notes

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

A/B/OFF

PRESET/TUNING/CH

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

FM/AM

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

MEMORY

DISPLAY

TUNING AUTO/MAN'L

AUDIO S ELECT

NIGHTSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

TONE CONTROL

l INPUT hl PROGRAM h

VOLUME

SCENE

1234

VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE

VIDEO AUX

VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE

VIDEO AUX

Game console or

video camera

3.5 mm

stereo mini

plug

Video

output

Audio

output

17 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Connect the audio components as follows.

■ Connecting a CD player and a CD

recorder/MD recorder

When you connect your CD player via analog and digital

connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL

INPUT jack.

■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and SUBWOOFER) for

discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks

on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right

output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 28), this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We

recommend that you connect a 5.1-channel speaker system

before using this feature.

Connecting audio components

Note

Make sure that this unit and other

components are unplugged from the

AC wall outlets.

MULTI CH INPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

DVD

DTV/CBL

DVR

OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUNDFRONT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

DTV/

CBL

DVD

DVD DVR

IN OUT

DTV/CBL MONITOR

OUT

MD/

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

CD player CD recorder or

MD recorder

Audio outAudio out Audio inAudio out

indicates recommended connections

indicates alternative connections

MULTI CH INPUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUNDFRONT

COAXIAL

DTV/

CBL

DVD

Multi-format player or

external decoder

Surround out

Center out

Subwoofer out

Front out

Notes

18 En

Connections

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the

designated terminals.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,

install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable

into the AC wall outlet.

■ Turning on this unit

Press

STANDBY/ON (or

POWER) to turn

on this unit.

When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay

before this unit can reproduce sound.

■ Set this unit to the standby mode

Press

STANDBY/ON (or

STANDBY) to set

this unit to the standby mode.

In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control.

Connecting the FM and AM

antennas

Notes

ANTENNA

GND

UNBAL.

-R

LAY)

AM loop

antenna

(supplied)

Ground

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

Indoor FM

antenna

(supplied)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft) of

vinyl-covered wire extended

outdoors from a window.

Connecting the power cable

Turning on and off the power

(U.S.A. model)

Power cable

To the AC wall outlet

19 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

1 Decoder indicator

Lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions.

2 ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

selected (see page 31).

3 VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 33).

4 SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 33).

5 Input source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

6 Tuner indicators

Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite

Radio tuning mode (see pages 34 and 37).

7 MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 28).

8 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the current volume level.

9 PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) digital audio signals.

0 Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 28).

A SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected

(see page 27).

B NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see

page 28).

C CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound

field program (see page 31).

HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program (see page 31).

D Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

E SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 30).

F Input channel and speaker indicators

LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE

signal.

Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal.

Front panel display

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

q PL

ENHANCER

SILENT CINEMA

NIGHT

AUTO

PRESET

TUNED

MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

neural

A B

HiFi DSP

LFE

LCR

SL SR

DIGITAL

STEREO

09 B ED

4 6 81 2 3 7

Input channel indicators

LFE

LCR

SL SR

LFE indicator

20 En

Connections

■ Using the remote control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 54.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types

of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

Notes

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

A/B/OFF

PRESET/TUNING/CH

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

FM/AM

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

MEMORY

DISPLAY

TUNING AUTO/MAN'L

AUDIO SELECT

NIGHTSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

TONE CONTROL

l INPUT hl PROGRAM h

VOLUME

SCENE

1234

VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE

VIDEO AUX

30º 30º

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

Basic setup

21 En

PREPARATION

English

The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort.

• Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit.

• If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU”

(see page 45).

• Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 45).

• Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.

• Press HRETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level.

1 Press

AMP on the remote control.

2 Press

MENU.

“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press

ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”.

“ROOM” appears in the front panel display.

ROOM: S >M L

4 Press Gl / h to select the desired setting.

Select the size of the room where you have installed

your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined

as follows:

Choices: S, M, L

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft

(4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m

)

M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft

(6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m

)

L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft

(7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m

)

[Other models]

S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m

M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m

L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m

5 Press Gn to select “SUBWOOFER” and then

Gl / h to select the desired setting.

Choices: YES, NONE

• Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your

system.

• Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in

your system.

6 Press Gn to select “SPEAKERS” and then

Gl / h to select the number of speakers

connected to this unit.

Basic setup

Notes

BASIC SETUP

Choice Display Speakers

2spk

Front L/R

3spk

Front L/R, Center

4spk

Front L/R, Surround L/R

5spk

Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R

SUBWOOFER

YES

SPEAKERS

5spk

LCR

SL SR

LCR

SL SR

22 En

Basic setup

7 Press

n to select “SET” and then

l / h

to select the desired setting.

SET >CANCEL

Choices: SET, CANCEL

• Select “SET” to apply the settings you made.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure

without making any changes.

You can also press

MENU to cancel the setup procedure.

8 Press

ENTER to confirm your selection.

If you selected “SET” in step 7, each speaker outputs

a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears

in the front panel display for a few seconds and then

“CHECK OK?” appears in the front panel display.

• Check the speaker connections (see page 5) and adjust the

“SPEAKERS” settings back in step 6, if necessary.

• The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test

tone flashes in the front panel display.

9 Press Gl / h to select the desired setting.

Choices: YES, NO

• Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if

the test tone levels from each speaker were

satisfactory.

• Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level

adjustment menu to balance the output level of

each speaker.

10 Press

ENTER to confirm your selection.

• If you selected “YES” in step 9, the setup

procedure is completed and the display returns to

the top set menu display.

• If you selected “NO” in step 9, the front speaker

level adjustment display appears in the front panel

display.

11 Press Gk / n to select a speaker and then

Gl / h to adjust the balance.

The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the

surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn.

•Press h to increase the value.

•Press l to decrease the value.

FR ----||----

• Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front

left and right speakers.

• Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front

left and center speakers.

• Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front

left and surround left speakers.

• Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the

surround left and surround right speakers.

• Select “SW” to adjust the balance between the

front left speaker and the subwoofer.

The available speaker channels differ depending on the

setting of the speakers.

12 Press

MENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP”.

CHECK:TestTone

CHECK OK?

YES

Note

SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES

23 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit is equipped with 13 preset SCENE templates for

various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory

setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to

each SCENE button:

SCENE 1: DVD Viewing

SCENE 2: Disc Listening

SCENE 3: TV Viewing

SCENE 4: Radio Listening

If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select

the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template

library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE

buttons on the front panel and the remote control.

1 Press and hold the desired

SCENE (or

SCENE) button for 3 seconds.

The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the

front panel starts to flash, and the name of currently

assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel

display.

2 Press

INPUT l / h (or press

AMP and

then

l / h) to select the desired template.

3 Press the

SCENE (or

SCENE) button

again to confirm the selection.

The selected SCENE template is assigned to the

button.

• If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds from

the last operation in these steps, this procedure is automatically

canceled.

• Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the

corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input

source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See

page 51 for details.

Selecting the SCENE templates

Selecting the desired SCENE

template

SCENE template library

(Image)

Select the desired SCENE template

Assign the

SCENE template

to the SCENE

button

DVD Viewing

Remote control

Flashes

3 seconds

Front panel

Notes

l INPUT h

AMP

ENTER

DVD MovieView

Front panel

Remote control

Remote controlFront panel

24 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

■ Which SCENE template would you like to select?

To enjoy XM Satellite Radio programs, you need to connect the XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately) to this unit (see page 37).

You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 26 for details.

Note

Radio Listening

CD Listening

CD Music Listening

XM Listening

DVD Live Viewing

DVD Movie Viewing

DVD Viewing

Music Disc Listening

Disc Listening

DVR Viewing

TV Viewing

TV Sports Viewing

Game Playing

DVD

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

TUNER (FM/AM)

DVD

DVR

Video sources

(DVD video,

Recorded video)

TV programs

Video games

Radio programs

Music discs (CD,

SA-CD or DVD-Audio)

SCENE templates

Which component do you

like for playback?

Which source do you like to

play back?

XM*

Default SCENE

buttons

25 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Preset SCENE template descriptions

SCENE template

Features

Input source Playback mode

DVD Viewing (SCENE 1 as the default setting)

Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents

on your DVD player.

DVD STRAIGHT

DVD Movie Viewing

Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your

DVD player.

DVD Movie Dramatic

DVD Live Viewing

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy music live video on

your DVD player.

DVD Pop/Rock

DVR Viewing

Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your

digital video recorder.

DVR Movie Dramatic

Music Disc Listening

Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on

your DVD player.

DVD 2ch Stereo

Disc Listening

(SCENE 2 as the default setting)

Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources as

the back ground music on your DVD player.

DVD 5ch Stereo

CD Listening

Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on

your CD player.

CD 2ch Stereo

CD Music Listening

Select this SCENE template when you play back music source as

the back ground music on your CD player.

CD 5ch Stereo

Radio Listening

(SCENE 4 as the default setting)

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio

programs.

TUNER

MUSIC ENHANCER

5ch STEREO

XM Listening

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy XM Satellite Radio

programs.

MUSIC ENHANCER

5ch STEREO

TV Viewing (SCENE 3 as the default setting)

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy TV programs.

DTV/CBL STRAIGHT

TV Sports Viewing

Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on

TV.

DTV/CBL TV Sports

Game Playing

Select this SCENE template when you play video games.

V-AUX Game

26 En

Selecting the SCENE templates

You can create your original SCENE templates for each

SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 13 SCENE

templates to create the original SCENE templates.

■ Customizing the preset SCENE

templates

Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates.

1 Press and hold the desired

SCENE button

for 3 seconds and then press

AMP.

The SCENE template customizing screen appears on

the front panel display.

When the SCENE template you want to customize is not

assigned to any of the

SCENE button, press

l / h

repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template (see

page 23).

2 Press

k / n to select the desired parameter

of the SCENE template and then

l / h to

select the desired value of the selected

parameter.

You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE

template:

• The input source component

• The active sound field programs or STRAIGHT

mode

• The night listening mode setting (see page 28)

− SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening

mode.

− CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the

CINEMA mode.

− MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the

MUSIC mode.

3 Press the

SCENE button again to confirm

the edit.

An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE

template.

• After changing the assignment of the SCENE template to the

SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the

SCENE template on the remote control. See page 51 for details.

• You can create a customized SCENE template for each

SCENE button, and if you create another customized

SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized

SCENE template with the new one.

• The customized SCENE template is only available for the

assigned

SCENE button.

Creating your original SCENE

templates

Note

SCENE template library

(Image)

Select the desired SCENE

template

Assign the SCENE

template to the SCENE

button

Create an original SCENE

template

3 seconds

AMP

Notes

PLAYBACK

27 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press

SPEAKERS repeatedly to select the

front speakers you want to use.

The respective speaker indicators lights up in the

front panel display.

3 Press

INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press

one of the input selector buttons (

)) to

select the desired input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.

4 Start playback on the selected component or

select a broadcast station.

• Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

• See page 34 for details about FM/AM tuning

instructions.

• See page 37 for details about XM Satellite Radio

tuning instructions.

5 Rotate

VOLUME (or press

VOLUME +/

–) to adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

6 Press

PROGRAM l / h (or press

AMP

and then press

PROG l / h) repeatedly to

select the desired sound field program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display.

See page 31 for details about sound field programs.

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 28).

• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48

kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT”

mode (see page 33).

• To display information about the currently selected input source

in the front panel display, see page 30 for details.

■ Guide to contents

Playback

Caution

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play

back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,

you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player

supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound

output level of your CD player before you play back a

CD encoded in DTS.

Basic operations

INPUT:DVD

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

Available input source

Currently selected input source

Notes

When you want to...

See

page

Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 29

Edit parameters of sound field programs 32

Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at

night

Use headphones 28

Select a decoder to play back sources with 32

Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 30

Movie Dramatic

Currently selected

surround field program

28 En

Playback

■ Using your headphones

Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo

analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on

the front panel.

When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode

activates automatically (see page 33).

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

speaker terminals.

• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the

left and right headphone channels.

■ Muting the audio output

Press

MUTE to mute the audio output.

Press

MUTE again to resume the audio output.

• You can also rotate

VOLUME (or press

VOLUME +/–) to

resume the audio output.

• You can adjust the muting level by using “MUTE TYP.” in

“SOUND MENU” (see page 48).

• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the

audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel

display when the audio output is resumed.

■ Selecting the component connected to

the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input

source

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 17) as the input

source.

Press

INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press

MULTI CH IN) so that “MULTI CH” appears in

the front panel display.

Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the

parameter for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 49).

• Sound field programs mode cannot be selected when the

component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is

selected as the input source.

• When headphones are used, signals are output only from the

front left and right channels.

■ Selecting the night listening mode

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night.

1 Press

AMP and then press

NIGHT

repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC”.

Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC,

NIGHT OFF

• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” to reduce the dynamic

range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to

hear at lower volumes.

• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” to preserve ease-of-

listening for all sounds.

• Select “NIGHT OFF” if you do not want to use this

feature.

When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

Additional operations

Notes

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

A/B/OFF

PRESET/TUNING/CH

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

FM/AM

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

MEMORY

DISPLAY

TUNING AUTO/MAN'L

AUDIO SELECT

NIGHTSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

TONE CONTROL

INPUT

PROGRAM

VOLUME

SCENE

1234

VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE

VIDEO AUX

Notes

29 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

2 Press

l / h to adjust the effect level while

“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is

displayed in the front panel display.

Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.

• Select “MID” for standard compression.

• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.

“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are

stored independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases:

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is selected as the input source.

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending

on the input source and surround sound settings you use.

■ Selecting audio input jacks

(AUDIO SELECT)

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this

feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack

assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are

assigned to an input source.

• We recommend setting audio input jack select to “AUTO” in

most cases.

• You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by

using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 50).

Press

AUDIO SELECT (or

AUDIO SEL)

repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack

select setting.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the

following order:

(1) Digital signals

(2) Analog signals

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog

signals are input, no sound is output.

This feature is not available when no digital input jack are

assigned to the currently selected input source.

■ Adjusting the tonal quality

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front left and right speaker channels.

Press

TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select

“BASS” or “TREBLE” and then press

PROGRAM l / h to adjust the corresponding

frequency response level.

• Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response.

• Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency

response.

• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency

sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround

speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers.

■ Adjusting speaker levels during

playback

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source.

This operation will override the level adjustment made in “SP

LEVEL” (see page 46).

1 Press

AMP and then press

LEVEL

repeatedly to select the speaker you want to

adjust.

Once you press FLEVEL on the remote control, you can

also select the speaker by pressing

k / n.

2 Press

l / h on the remote control to

adjust the speaker output level.

The control range is from –10 dB to +10 dB.

You can press

A/B/C/D/E to select a speaker and then

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to adjust the speaker output

level.

Notes

Note

A.SEL:AUTO

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

Audio input jack

select setting

Notes

Note

Display Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SUR.L

Surround left speaker

SUR.R

Surround right speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

30 En

Playback

■ Displaying the signal information

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

1 Press

AMP and then press

MENU on

the remote control.

“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.

;BASIC SETUP

2 Press

k / n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL

INFO” and then press

ENTER.

3 Press

k / n to switch the displayed

information.

The following information about the input source

appears in the front panel display.

4 Press

MENU to exit.

■ Using the sleep timer

Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time.

Press

AMP and then press

SLEEP

repeatedly to set the amount of time.

Each time you press

SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the

amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is

set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound field

program.

• To cancel the sleep timer, press

SLEEP on the remote

control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front

panel display.

• You can also cancel the sleep timer setting by pressing

STANDBY/ON (or

STANDBY) to set this unit to the

standby mode.

■ Playing video sources in the

background

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Press the input selector buttons on the remote

control to select a video source and then an

audio source.

Display Description

FORMAT

Signal format.

SAMPL.

The number of samples per second taken

from a continuous signal to make a discrete

signal.

The number of source channels in the input

signal (front/surround/LFE).

B.RATE

The number of bits passing a given point

per second.

FLAG

Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital,

or PCM signals that cue this unit to

automatically switch decoders.

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP 120min

Audio sources

Video sources

DVD

V-AU X XM

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R TUNER

MULTI CH IN

DVD

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

31 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital

decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback

from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source.

Press

PROGRAM l / h (or press

AMP and

then press

PROG l / h repeatedly).

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with the corresponding input

source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 28).

• When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48

kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT”

mode (see page 33).

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.

• You can select “Music Enh. 2ch” and “Music Enh. 5ch” by

pressing

ENHANCER on the remote control repeatedly.

The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the

actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the

front, back, left and right.

Sound field programs

Notes

Sound field program descriptions

Category Program Features

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The

sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of

vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments.

Hall

HiFi DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The program

uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful

reverberation and a majestic atmosphere.

Jazz

HiFi DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music.

It uses data collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation.

ENTERTAIN

Game

CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games.

The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where

you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies.

TV Sports

CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with

a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come

clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a

comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium.

MOVIE

Movie Spacious

CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular

sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic

range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds.

Movie Dramatic

CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on three-

dimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces sound

effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center

orientation of voices as pivots.

STEREO

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are.

5ch Stereo

Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for

background music at parties.

ENHANCER

Music Enh. 2ch

Music Enh. 5ch

Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in 2-channel or

5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing

harmonics in a compression artifact.

Note

32 En

Sound field programs

■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel

sources (surround decode mode)

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multi-channels.

Press

AMP and then press

SUR. DECODE

repeatedly to select a decoder.

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the type of source you are playing and your personal

preference.

■ Editing sound fields parameters

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset

parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial

settings, you can change some of the parameters to better

suit the input source or your listening room.

1 While listening to a source, press

AMP

and then press Gk / n to select the desired

parameter.

2 Press Gl / h to change the parameter

value.

You cannot change parameter values when “MEM. GUARD” in

“OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 50).

Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.

For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports,

Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic:

DSP level DSP LEVEL

Function: Adjusts the effect level.

Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

For PRO LOGIC II Music:

Panorama PANORAMA

Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround

speakers as well as the front speakers

for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

Dimension DIMENSION

Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field

either towards the front or towards the

rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards

the front), initial setting is STD

(standard).

Center width CT WIDTH

Function: Adjusts the center image from all

three front speakers to varying

degrees. A larger value adjusts the

center image towards the front left and

right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only

from center speaker) to 7 (center

channel sound is output only from

front left and right speakers), initial

setting is 3.

For Music Enh. 2ch and Music Enh. 5ch

Effect level

Function: Adjusts the effect level.

Choices: LOW, HIGH

STANDARD Functions

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any

sources

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

movie sources

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

music sources

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

game sources

Neural

Neural Surround processing for any

sources

Note

33 En

Sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■

Using sound field programs without

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers by creating

virtual speakers.

If you set “SUR. LR”

to “NONE” (see page 45), Virtual

CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you

select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP program (see

page 31).

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. LR” is

set to “NONE” (see page 45) in the following cases:

– when “5ch Stereo” (see page 31) is selected.

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and

sound field programs with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA

activates automatically whenever you connect headphones

to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or

HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 31). When

activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input

source (see page 28).

■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources

(Straight decoding mode)

When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, multi-

channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate

channels without any additional effect processing. 2-

channel stereo sources are output from only the front left

and right speakers.

Press

STRAIGHT (or press

AMP and then

STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”.

To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press

STRAIGHT (or

STRAIGHT) again so that

“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display.

Note

FM/AM TUNING

34 En

There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and

there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use

the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Press

INPUT l / h repeatedly so that

“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel

display.

2 Press

FM/AM to select the reception band

(FM or AM).

3 Press

TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the

AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel

display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,

automatic tuning is not possible. Press

PRESET/

TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once

to begin automatic tuning.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

If the signal received from the station you want to select is

weak, tune into it manually.

Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the

tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.

1 Press

INPUT l / h repeatedly so that

“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel

display.

2 Press

FM/AM to select the reception band

(FM or AM).

3 Press

TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the

AUTO indicator disappears from the front

panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display,

manual tuning is not possible. Press

PRESET/

TUNING to turn the colon (:) off.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to

tune into the desired station manually.

You can hold down the button to continue searching.

FM/AM tuning

Automatic tuning

AUTO

1440

kHz

Lights up

No colon (:)

AUTO

TUNED

1530

kHz

Lights up

Manual tuning

Note

1440

kHz

No colon (:)

35 En

FM/AM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8

preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station

groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1 Press

INPUT l / h repeatedly so that

“TUNER” is displayed in the front panel

display.

2 Press

FM/AM to select “FM” as the

reception band.

3 Press and hold

MEMORY for more than 3

seconds.

The preset station number as well as the MEMORY

and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5

seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current

frequency and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

You can select the preset station group and the preset station

number where the first received station will be stored by pressing

A/B/C/D/E and then

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is

cleared when you store a new station under the same preset

station number.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually

and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page.

You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)

manually.

1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.

See page 34 for tuning instructions.

2 Press

MEMORY.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 10 seconds.

3 Press

A/B/C/D/E and

PRESET/

TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly to select a

preset station group (A1 to E8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel

display.

4 Press

MEMORY while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset station group and

number you have selected.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is

cleared when you store a new station under the same preset

station number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

Automatic preset tuning

Notes

Flashes

Flash

AUTO

MEMORY

A1:FM 87.50MHz

Manual preset tuning

Notes

TUNED

MEMORY

630

kHz

Preset station number

Flashes

The displayed station has been stored as C3.

TUNED

630

kHz

36 En

FM/AM tuning

You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station group and number under which it was

stored.

When performing this operation with the remote control, press

TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

1 Press

A/B/C/D/E (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to select the desired preset

station group (A to E).

The preset station group letter appears in the front

panel display and changes each time you press the

button.

2 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired

preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display along with the station band and

frequency.

You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly

by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.

You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using

A/B/C/D/E

and

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.

2 Press and hold

PRESET/TUNING for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” using

A/B/C/D/

E and

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

See “Selecting preset stations” on this page.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING again.

“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and

the assignments of the two preset stations are

exchanged.

Selecting preset stations

87.50

MHz

Exchanging preset stations

MEMORY

87.50

MHz

Flashes

MEMORY

90.60

MHz

Flashes

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

37 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of

commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk

and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital

audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from

classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music

fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of

music is matched by its passion for live sporting events,

talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy,

children’s programming, and much more.

For U.S. customers, information about XM Satellite Radio

is available online at www.xmradio.com.

For Canadian customers, information about XM Canada is

online at www.xmradio.ca.

This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder

that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the

XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting

in a full surround sound experience.

The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48

contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii)

and Canada.

■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.

Hardware and required monthly subscription sold

separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time

activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer

only. All fees and programming subject to change.

Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at

xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian

residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous United

rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of

their respective owners.

Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock (sold

separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of

this unit.

For details, see the operating instructions provided with

XM Mini-Tuner Dock.

• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,

the XM Mini-Tuner Dock must be placed at or near a southerly

facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can

mount it indoors or outdoors.

• Use the “XM ANT.” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 50) to display the XM Satellite Radio reception level in the

front panel display. For the best reception, orient the connected

XM Mini-Tuner so that a value of 60% or more is displayed.

If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, the

XM Mini-Tuner Dock may not be connected to the XM jack on

the rear panel of this unit properly. See “Connecting the XM

Mini-Tuner Dock” on this page and check the connection.

XM Satellite Radio tuning

Note

Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock

Note

DVD

XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock

(sold separately)

38 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock,

inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Dock to

your XM Ready

home audio system, and installed the

antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving

XM programming. There are three places to find your

eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on

the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0.

Record the Radio ID in the following eight squares for

reference.

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at

http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-

2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal

from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation

normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods

you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for

up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on

your XM Ready home audio system you are done. For more

information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at

www.xmradio.ca or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877-GET-

XMSR (1-877-438-9677).

1 Press

INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press

XM) to select “XM” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in

the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio

information (such as channel number, channel name,

category, artist name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel appears in the front panel display.

When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

• To select a channel from the all channel list, see

“All Channel Search mode” on page 39.

• To select a channel by category, see “Category

Search mode” on page 39.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” on page 39.

• To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, see “Direct Number Access

mode” on page 39.

• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM

HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio

broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 32).

• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see

page 40).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the

front panel display (see page 41).

Activating XM Satellite Radio

Note

Basic XM Satellite Radio

operations

[001] Preview

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

Lights up

39 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

When performing these operations with the remote control, press

XM to select “XM” as the input source.

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n).

• To display the XM Radio ID number displayed in the front

panel display, select channel “0”.

■ Category Search mode

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding

PRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h (or

PRESET/CH

k / n).

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels”

on page 40.

All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001 Preview” by the initial

factory setting.

1 Press

SEARCH MODE (or

SRCH

MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

3 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.

■ Direct Number Access mode

1 Press

SRCH MODE repeatedly to select

“ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the numeric buttons (V) to enter the

desired three-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons as shown below.

The display changes as follows.

• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the

numeric buttons (V) and then press

ENT. to confirm the

input number. Instead of pressing

ENT. to tune into the

channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit

confirms the entered channel number.

• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a

one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms

the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (V) or

ENT. cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.

ENHANCER

<XM> --1

<XM> -12

<XM>123

40 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

on page 39.

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on

page 38 for details.

2 Press

MEMORY (or

XM MEMORY).

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 10 seconds.

You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

3 Press

CATEGORY (or

A-E/CAT. l / h)

repeatedly to select a preset channel group

(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The preset channel group letter appears in the front

panel display.

4 Press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select a

preset channel number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The preset channel number appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press

MEMORY (or

XM MEMORY) to

set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel

as a preset channel while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number

for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns

off in the front panel display.

Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in

the same preset channel group and number is cleared.

Setting XM Satellite Radio preset

channels

Note

C [043] XMU

MEMORY

Currently selected preset channel group

Flashes

Note

C5 [043] XMU

MEMORY

Currently selected preset channel number

Flashes

C5:[043] XMU

Colon (:)

41 En

XM Satellite Radio tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such

as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,

or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front

panel display.

If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel

display, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models

only)” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 59 for appropriate

remedies.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press

DISPLAY (or

DISPLAY) repeatedly to

toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio

information display modes.

• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric

characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM

Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a

continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by

using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 50).

• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that

cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with a space.

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information

Note

Channel number/name

Channel category

Artist name/song title

RECORDING

42 En

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating

instructions for those components.

• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.

• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 29) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 29) and the sound field programs

(see page 31) do not affect recorded material.

• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.

• The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if

your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source.

• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.

• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is

turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

1 Turn on all the connected components.

2 Press

INPUT

l / h repeatedly (or press

one of the input selector buttons (C)) to

select the source component you want to

record from.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Recording

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture

itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

Set menu

43 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can use the following parameters in set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit

operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP

Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 21).

■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.

Input menu 2 INPUT MENU

Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.

Set menu

Parameter Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET

Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover

frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals.

B)SP LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

C)SP DISTANCE

Adjusts the distance of each speaker.

D)CENTER GEQ

Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.

E)LFE LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

F)D. RANGE

Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

G)AUDIO SET

Adjusts the muting level, audio delay settings, maximum volume level and initial volume

level.

Parameter Features Page

A)INPUT ASSIGN

Assigns the input jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.

B)INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the input source.

C)VOLUME TRIM

Adjusts the output volume of each jack.

D)DECODER MODE

Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the

rear panel of this unit.

E)MULTI CH SET

Select the video source played in the background of the sources in put from the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks.

44 En

Set menu

Option menu 3 OPTION MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.

The “XM RADIO SET” parameter is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models.

■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO

Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 30).

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

You can change the set menu parameters while this unit is

reproducing sound.

1 Press

AMP and then press

MENU on

the remote control.

“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.

2 Press

k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.

3 Press

ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.

“1 SOUND MENU” appears in the front panel

display.

4 Press

k / n repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

menu.

The following menus appear in the front panel

display as you press

k / n repeatedly.

5 Press

k / n repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

submenu.

• Repeat steps 5 and 6 to navigate to and enter the

items you want to adjust.

• To return to the previous menu level, press

RETURN.

6 Press

k / n to select the desired parameter

and then

l / h to change the parameter

value.

•Press G h to increase the value.

•Press G l to decrease the value.

7 Press

MENU to exit from set menu.

Parameter Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET

Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display and the way in which the XM information

is displayed.

B)MEMORY GUARD

Locks sound field program parameters and other set menu settings.

C)AUDIO SELECT

Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources connected

to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.

D)PARAM. INI

Sets all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings.

E)XM RADIO SET

Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals.

Note

Using set menu

BASIC SETUP

MANUAL SETUP

1 SOUND MENU

2 INPUT MENU

3 OPTION MENU

45 En

Set menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using

LCD monitors or projectors.

■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET

Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.

FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B

Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers

connected to the FRONT B terminals.

Choices: FRONT, ZONE B

• Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on and off

when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main zone.

• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the

FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If FRONT

A is turned off and FRONT B is turned on, all the

speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are

muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B

terminals only.

• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the

sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B

terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”.

• If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to

“ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA

DSP mode (see page 33).

Front speakers FRONT

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

When the front speakers are large

Select “LARGE” (large).

When the front speakers are small

Select “SMALL” (small).

When “BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 46), you can

select only “LARGE” in “FRONT”. If the value of “FRONT” is

set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit

automatically changes the value to “LARGE”.

Center speaker CENTER

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

When the center speaker is large

Select “LRG” (large).

When the center speaker is small

Select “SML” (small).

When you do not use the center speaker

Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are

directed to the front left and right speakers.

Surround left/right speakers SUR. LR

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

When the surround speakers are large

Select “LRG” (large).

When the surround speakers are small

Select “SML” (small).

When you do not use the surround speakers

Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode (see page 33).

1 SOUND MENU

Notes

Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger:

large

Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm

(6.5 in): small

Note

46 En

Set menu

LFE/Bass out BASS OUT

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE

(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.

Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

When a subwoofer is connected to this unit

and you want to get natural bass sound

Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well

as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to

“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.

When a subwoofer is connected to this unit

and you want to get rich bass sound

Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of

any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE

signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to

the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front

left and right channels are directed to the front left and

right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the

“FRONT” setting (see page 45).

When you do not use a subwoofer

Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the low-

frequency signals of the front left and right channels,

and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to

“SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left

and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT” setting

(see page 45).

Crossover CROSSOVER

Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in

“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 44 and 45). All frequencies

below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer

or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in

“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 44 and 45).

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE

Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if

bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

Choices: NRM, REV

• Select “NRM” if you do not want to reverse the phase

of your subwoofer.

• Select “REV” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer.

■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL

Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each

speaker.

Control range: –10 to +10 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of

the speakers.

SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker

Front left speaker

Front right speaker

Center speaker

Surround left speaker

Surround right speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

Note

47 En

Set menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same

time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)

[Other models]: meters (m)

• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.

• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of

the speakers.

■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band

(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic

equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of

the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You

can make adjustments while listening to the currently

selected source component or a test tone.

Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

Press

k / n to select a frequency band and

l / h to adjust

the selected frequency band.

Following is an example where “100Hz” is selected as the

frequency band.

Test tone TEST

Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ”

while listening to a test tone.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently

selected source component.

• Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and

front left speakers.

■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of

your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Control range: –20 to 0 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Speaker LFE SP LFE

Adjusts the speaker LFE level.

Headphone LFE HP LFE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “BASS OUT” (see page 46), some

signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack.

■ Dynamic range F)D. RANGE

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is

decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

Choices: MIN, STD, MAX

• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low

volume levels.

• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.

Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest

amount of dynamic range.

Speaker dynamic range SP D.R

Adjusts the speaker compression.

Headphone dynamic range HP D.R

Adjusts the headphone compression.

SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker

FRONT L

Front left speaker

FRONT R

Front right speaker

CENTER

Center speaker

SUR. L

Surround left speaker

SUR. R

Surround right speaker

SWFR

Subwoofer

Note

100Hz--||-- 0

48 En

Set menu

■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET

Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this

unit.

Mute type MUTE TYP.

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (see page 28).

Choices: FULL, –20dB

• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio

output.

• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio delay A.DELAY

Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize

it with the video image. This may be necessary when

using certain LCD monitors or projectors.

Control range: 0 to 160 ms

Control step: 1 ms

Maximum volume MAX VOL.

Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the

main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected

loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume

range is 16 dB to –80 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.”

is set to –5 dB, the volume range becomes

–5 dB to –80 dB.

Control range: 16 dB, 10 dB to –30 dB

Control step: 5 dB

The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume”

setting. For example, if “INI VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX

VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to

–30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.

Initial volume INI VOL.

Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of

this unit is turned on.

Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16 dB

Control step: 1 dB

The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.”

setting.

Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the input

mode or rename the input source.

■ Input assignment

A)INPUT ASSIGN

Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the

component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do

not correspond to your needs. Change the following

parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively

connect more components.

Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component by using

INPUT l / h (or

the input selector buttons (C) on the remote control).

For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 1

IN (1)

Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 and 3

IN (2)

IN (3)

Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

You cannot select a specific item more than once.

Note

2 INPUT MENU

Note

49 En

Set menu

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input source

that appears in the front panel display.

The following is an example where “DVD” is renamed

“My DVD”.

1 Press one of the input selector buttons (

)

MULTI CH IN to select the input

source you want to change the name of.

2 Press

AMP and then press

l / h on the

remote control to place the “_” (underscore)

under the space or the character you want to

edit.

3 Press

k / n to select the character you

want to use and then press

l / h to move

to the next space.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press

n to change the character in the following order,

or press

k to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,

*, –, +, etc.)

4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each

input source.

5 Press

MENU to exit from “INPUT

RENAME”.

■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at

each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of

each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume

when switching between input sources.

Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD,

DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, MULTI CH IN,

XM RADIO

Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 1.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE

Decoder select mode

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for

the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks

when you turn on the power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signals and select the

appropriate decoder mode.

• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically

select the last decoder mode used the connected input

source.

DTS decoder prioritize setting

Choices: AUTO, DTS

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect input signal types and select the appropriate

input mode.

• Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD.

■ Multi channel input setup

E)MULTI CH SET

BGV BGV

Use this feature to select the video source played in the

background of the sources input from the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks.

Choices: LAST, DVR, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, DVD

Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last

selected video source as the background video source.

Notes

DVR

DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

DVD My DVD

MULTI CH IN

DVD

V-AU X XM

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R

TUNER

50 En

Set menu

Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET

Dimmer DIMMER

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: –4 to 0

Control step: 1

• Press

l to make the front panel display dimmer.

• Press

h to make the front panel display brighter.

Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL

Use this feature to set whether to display the information

(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel

display in a continuous manner or by the first 14

alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once

when “XM” is selected as the input source.

Choices: CONT, ONCE

• Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the

front panel display in a continuous manner.

• Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the

front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric

characters after scrolling all characters once.

■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Memory guard MEM. GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEM. GUARD” feature.

• Select “ON” to protect:

– sound field program parameters

– all set menu items

– all speaker levels

– SCENE template parameters

When “MEM. GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and

adjust any other set menu items.

■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT

Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack

select setting for the input sources when you turn on the

power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signals and select the

appropriate input mode.

• Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically

select the last input mode used for the connected input

source (see page 29).

■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI

Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field

programs to the initial factory settings.

Choices: NO, YES

• Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and

return to the previous menu level.

• Select “YES” to set all the sound field parameters to

the initial factory settings.

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters.

• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when

“MEM. GUARD” is set to “ON”.

■ XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

XM Radio antenna XM ANT.

Use this feature to check the current reception level of the

XM Satellite Radio signals (see page 37). For the best

reception, orient XM Mini-Tuner Dock so that a value of

60% or more is displayed here.

Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%

“NONE” is displayed if XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not connected to

this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see

page 37).

3 OPTION MENU

Note

Notes

Note

Remote control features

51 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code

for each input source (see page 54).

■ Controlling the input source

components in the SCENE mode

You can operate both this unit and the input source

component by using the remote control. You must set the

appropriate remote control code for each input source in

advance (see page 54).

1 Press the desired

SCENE button on the

remote control.

2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below

to control the input source component of the

selected SCENE template.

These buttons control the input source component. See page 53

for details of the function of each button.

■ Setting input source of the customized

SCENE template on the remote control

If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE

template, you must set the input source of the SCENE

template on the remote control to operate the input source

component correctly.

Press and hold the

SCENE button and the

desired input selector button (C) for 3 seconds.

Press the

SCENE button again to operate the input source

component.

Remote control features

Using remote control on the SCENE feature

Note

REC

SUR.DECODE NIGHT

STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP MUTE

MULTI CH IN

POWER

4321

ENT.

DVD

V-AU X XM

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R

TUNER

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

SCENE buttons

52 En

Remote control features

■ Controlling this unit

Press

AMP to control this unit.

These buttons always control this unit.

These buttons control this unit only when

AMP is pressed.

■ Controlling a TV

Press

DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your

TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for

DTV/CBL (see page 54).

These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether

you press

DTV/CBL or not.

These buttons control your TV only when

DTV/CBL is

pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on

page 53.

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

REC

SUR.DECODE NIGHT

STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP MUTE

MULTI CH IN

POWER

4321

ENT.

DVD

V-AU X XM

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R

TUNER

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

AMP

Notes

Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV

TV POWER

Turns on or off the power.

TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.

TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume

level.

TV INPUT

Changes the input source.

TV MUTE

Mutes the audio output.

REC

SUR.DECODE NIGHT

STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP MUTE

MULTI CH IN

POWER

4321

ENT.

DVD

V-AU X XM

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R

TUNER

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

DTV/CBL

53 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Controlling other components

Press one of the input selector buttons (C) or to

control other components. You must set the appropriate

remote control code for each input source in advance (see

page 54). The following table shows the function of each

control button used to control other components assigned

to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons

may not correctly operate the selected component.

The remote control has 9 modes (input areas) to control

components so that the remote control can operate up to 9

different components.

This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.

These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 54).

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP MUTE

MULTI CH IN

POWER

DVD

V-AU X XM

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R

TUNER

AVTV

SCENE

4321

REC

SUR.DECODE NIGHT

STRAIGHTENHANCER

PROG

4321

ENT.

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

Remote control

DVD player/

recorder

VCR

Digital TV/

Cable TV

LD player CD player

MD/CD

recorder

Tuner

1 AV POWER

Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1

2 TITLE

Title Band

3 PRESET/CH k

Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8)

PRESET/CH n Down

VCR channel

down

Down

Preset down

(1-8)

A-E/CAT. l Left Left

Preset down

(A-E)

A-E/CAT. h Right Right

Preset up

(A-E)

ENTER Enter Enter

4 RETURN

Return Return

5 REC

Disc skip

(player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec Rec *2 Disc skip Rec

p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play

w Search backward Search backward

Search backward

Search backward Search backward Search backward

f Search forward Search forward

Search forward

Search forward Search forward Search forward

e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause

b Skip backward Skip backward

Skip backward

Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward

a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward

s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop

6 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons

Preset stations

(1-8)

7 MENU

Menu Menu

8 DISPLAY

Display Display Display Display Display Display

9 ENT.

Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index

Notes

54 En

Remote control features

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of

available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote

control codes” at the end of this manual.

Remote control code default settings

You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a

Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case,

try setting another Yamaha remote control code.

1 While pressing and holding one of the input

selector buttons (C) on the remote control to

select the input area you want to set up,

press AV POWER for more than 3 seconds.

2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (

) to

enter the four-digit remote control code for

the component to be used.

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,

try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the

setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup

procedure.

Setting remote control codes

Input

source

Component

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

FM/AM

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

MEMORY

DISPLAY

TUNING AUTO/MAN'L

AUDIO SELECT

NIGHTSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

TONE CONTROL

l INPUT hl PROGRAM h

VOLUME

SCENE

1234

VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE

VIDEO AUX

17634 5

90 DA C E FB

APPENDIX

■ Remote control

REC

SUR.DECODE NIGHT

STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP MUTE

MULTI CH IN

POWER

4321

ENT.

DVD

V-AU X XM

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R

TUNER

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

iii

List of remote control codes

ACER 0093

ACME 0207

ACURA 0208

ADA 0255

ADC 0206

ADMIRAL 0058, 0205, 0206,

0210, 0211

ADYSON 0200, 0207

AGASHI 0200

AGAZI 0206

AGB 0204

AIKO 0127, 0200, 0207,

0208

AIWA 0028, 0139, 0229,

0237

AKAI 0059, 0065, 0127,

0129, 0130, 0200,

0204, 0208, 0209,

0213, 0217, 0218,

0255

AKIBA 0209, 0218

AKURA 0206, 0209, 0218

ALARON 0200

ALBA 0200, 0207, 0208,

0209, 0217, 0218

ALBIRAL 0212

ALLSTAR 0213

AMPLIVISION

0207

AMSTRAD 0204, 0206, 0208,

0209, 0218

AMTRON 0062

ANAM 0208

ANAM NATIONAL

0062

ANGLO 0208

ANITECH 0206, 0208

ANSONIC 0203, 0208

AOC 0060, 0061

APEX 0118, 0122, 0132

ARC EN CIEL 0216

ARCAM 0200

ARCAM DELTA

0207

ARISTONA 0213, 0217

ASA 0205, 0211

ASBERG 0213

ASTRA 0208

ASUKA 0200, 0206, 0207,

0209, 0218

ATLANTIC 0200, 0207, 0213,

0217

ATORI 0208

AUDIOSONIC 0207, 0208, 0209,

0213, 0216, 0217,

0218

AUDIOTON 0207

AUDIOVOX 0062

AUTOVOX 0205, 0206, 0207

AWA 0200

BAIRD 0216

BANG & OLUFSEN

0205

BASIC LINE 0208, 0209, 0213,

0218

BASTIDE 0207

BAUR 0217

BEKO 0228

BELCOR 0060

BELL & HOWELL

0058, 0064

BENQ 0051, 0081

BEON 0213, 0217

BESTAR 0213

BINATONE 0207

BLACK STAR 0214

BLAUPUNKT 0255

BLUE SKY 0209, 0218

BONDSTEC 0214

BOOTS 0207

BRADFORD 0062

BRANDT 0216, 0226

BRIONVEGA 0205, 0213, 0217

BRITANNIA 0200, 0207

BROCKWOOD

0060

BROKSONIC 0138

BRUNS 0205

BSR 0215

BTC 0209, 0218

BUSH 0177, 0208, 0209,

0210, 0213, 0215,

0216, 0217, 0218,

0230, 0237

CANDLE 0060, 0061

CAPSONIC 0206

CASCADE 0208

CATHAY 0213, 0217

CCE 0127

CELEBRITY 0059

CENTURION 0213, 0217

CENTURY 0205

CGE 0214, 0215

CIMLINE 0208, 0218

CITIZEN 0060, 0061, 0062,

0064

CITY 0208

CLARIVOX 0212, 0217

CLATRONIC 0206, 0207, 0208,

0209, 0213, 0214,

0218

CMS 0200

COLORTYME 0060, 0061

CONCERTO 0060, 0061

CONCORDE 0208

CONDOR 0200, 0207, 0213

CONTEC 0200, 0207, 0208

CONTEC/CONY

0062

CONTINENTAL EDISON

0216

COSMEL 0208

CRAIG 0062

CROSLEY 0205, 0214, 0215

CROWN 0062, 0063, 0128,

0208, 0213, 0217

CS ELECTRONICS

0200, 0207, 0209,

0214, 0218

CTC 0214

CURTIS MATHES

0057, 0060, 0061,

0064, 0065

CXC 0062

CYBERTRON 0209, 0218

DAEWOO 0060, 0061, 0120,

0127, 0155, 0193,

0200, 0207, 0208,

0213, 0218, 0238

DAINICHI 0200, 0209, 0218

DANSAI 0200, 0206, 0213,

0217

DANTAX 0217

DAYTRON 0060, 0061, 0208

DE GRAAF 0210

DECCA 0204, 0207, 0213,

0217

DESMET 0213, 0217

DIAMOND 0200

DIMENSIA 0057

DIXI 0208, 0213, 0217

DTS 0208

DUAL 0207, 0215, 0216

DUAL-TEC 0207, 0208, 0215

DUMONT 0060, 0127, 0205,

0207

DURABRAND

0126

DUX 0217

DYNATRON 0213, 0217

ELBE 0203, 0204, 0212,

0218

ELBE-SHARP 0204

ELCIT 0204, 0205

ELECTRO TECH

0208

ELECTROBAND

0059

ELECTROHOME

0059, 0060, 0061

ELIN 0200, 0207, 0213,

0217

ELITE 0209, 0213, 0218

ELMAN 0215

ELTA 0200, 0208

EMERSON 0060, 0061, 0062,

0064, 0128, 0205

ENVISION 0060, 0061

ERRES 0213, 0217

ESA 0080

ETRON 0208

EURO-FEEL 0206

EUROLINE 0217

EUROMAN 0200

EUROMANN 0206, 0207, 0213

EUROPHON 0200, 0204, 0207,

0213, 0215

FENNER 0208

FERGUSON 0212, 0217, 0226

FIDELITY 0200, 0207, 0210

FINLANDIA 0210

FINLUX 0204, 0205, 0207,

0213, 0215, 0217

FIRSTLINE 0200, 0207, 0208,

0213, 0214

FISHER 0064, 0127, 0128,

0205, 0207, 0215

FLINT 0213, 0218

FORMENTI 0200, 0205, 0207,

0215, 0217

FORMENTI-PHOENIX

0200

FORTRESS 0205

FRONTECH 0206, 0208, 0210,

0211, 0214

FUJITSU 0023, 0024, 0025,

0088, 0127

FUNAI 0033, 0034, 0035,

0036, 0037, 0062,

0206

FUTURETECH

0062

GATEWAY 0094

GBC 0208, 0215, 0218

GE 0057, 0060, 0061,

0122, 0147

GEC 0204, 0207, 0211,

0213, 0217

GELOSO 0208, 0210, 0215

GENERAL TECHNIC

0208

GENEXXA 0209, 0211, 0213,

0218

GIBRALTER 0060

GOLDHAND 0200

GOLDSTAR 0060, 0061, 0127,

0128, 0200, 0201,

0207, 0208, 0210,

0213, 0214, 0215,

0217

GOODMANS 0171, 0201, 0204,

0206, 0208, 0213,

0217, 0240

GPM 0209, 0218

GRAETZ 0211

GRANADA 0204, 0207, 0210,

0213, 0217

GRANDIN 0208, 0209, 0217

GRUNDIG 0128, 0130, 0222,

0236, 0255

GRUNPY 0062

HALIFAX 0200, 0206, 0207

HALLMARK 0060, 0061

HAMPTON 0200, 0207

HANSEATIC 0203, 0207, 0208,

0213, 0215, 0217

HANTAREX 0204, 0208

HARVARD 0062

HCM 0206, 0207, 0208,

0218

HIFIVOX 0216

HIGASHI 0200

HINARI 0208, 0209, 0213,

0217, 0218

HISAWA 0209, 0218

HITACHI 0006, 0014, 0015,

0016, 0042, 0060,

0061, 0095, 0105,

0127, 0156, 0179,

0180, 0204, 0207,

0210, 0211, 0215,

0216, 0251

HORNYPHON 0213

HOSHAI 0209, 0218

HUANYU 0200, 0207

HYGASHI 0200, 0207

HYPER 0200, 0207, 0208,

0214, 0215

HYPSON 0206, 0207, 0213,

0217

ICE 0127, 0200, 0206,

0207, 0208, 0209,

0213, 0218

ICES 0200, 0218

IMA 0062

IMPERIAL 0211, 0213, 0214,

0215

INDIANA 0213, 0217

INFINITY 0063

INGELEN 0211

INGERSOL 0208

APPENDIX

INNO HIT 0201, 0204, 0207,

0208, 0209, 0213,

0217, 0218

INNOVATION 0206, 0208

INTERBUY 0208, 0214

INTERFUNK 0205, 0211, 0213,

0214, 0216, 0217

INTERNATIONAL

0200

INTERVISION 0206, 0207, 0218

IRRADIO 0201, 0208, 0209,

0213, 0217, 0218

ISUKAI 0209, 0218

ITC 0207, 0215

ITS 0200, 0209, 0213,

0218

ITT 0129, 0208, 0211

ITV 0208, 0217

JBL 0063

JC PENNEY 0057, 0060, 0061

JCB 0059

JENSEN 0060, 0061

JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,

0108, 0136, 0153,

0178, 0190, 0213,

0218

KAISUI 0200, 0207, 0208,

0209, 0218

KAMOSONIC 0207

KAMP 0200, 0207

KAPSCH 0211

KARCHER 0207, 0208, 0212,

0217

KAWASHO 0059, 0060, 0061,

0200

KENDO 0128, 0210

KENNEDY 0215

KENWOOD 0060, 0061

KINGSLEY 0200, 0207

KLOSS NOVABEAM

0062

KNEISSEL 0203

KOLSTER 0213

KONKA 0209, 0218

KORPEL 0213, 0217

KORTING 0205

KOYODA 0208

KTV 0062, 0127, 0207

KYOTO 0200, 0212

LENCO 0208

LENOIR 0207, 0208

LESA 0214

LEYCO 0206, 0213, 0217

LG 0016, 0038, 0039,

0127, 0128, 0157,

0158, 0163, 0164,

0166, 0188, 0189,

0200, 0201, 0207,

0208, 0210, 0213,

0214, 0215, 0217

LIESENK 0217

LIFE 0206, 0208

LIFETEC 0206, 0208, 0218

LOEWE 0063, 0128, 0203,

0204, 0223, 0227

LOEWE OPTA 0205, 0213, 0217

LOGIK 0058

LUMA 0210, 0217

LUMATRON 0210, 0213, 0217

LUX MAY 0213

LUXMAN 0060, 0061

LUXOR 0201, 0207, 0210

LXI 0057, 0061, 0063,

0064

MAG 0050

MAGNADYNE

0204, 0205, 0214,

0215, 0217

MAGNAFON 0200, 0204, 0207

MAGNAVOX 0060, 0061, 0063,

0102, 0103, 0150

MAGNUM 0206, 0208

MAJESTIC 0058

MANDOR 0206

MANESTH 0206, 0207, 0213,

0217

MARANTZ 0060, 0061, 0063,

0090, 0213, 0217

MARELLI 0205

MARK 0200, 0213, 0217

MATSUI 0204, 0207, 0208,

0210, 0213, 0217

MEDIATOR 0213, 0217

MEDION 0206, 0208

MEGATRON 0061

MELECTRONIC

0200, 0207, 0208,

0211, 0213, 0216,

0217

MEMOREX 0058, 0061, 0064,

0208

MEMPHIS 0208

METZ 0205

MGA 0060, 0061

MICROMAXX 0206, 0208

MICROSTAR 0206, 0208

MINERVA 0204

MINOKA 0213

MITSUBISHI 0006, 0015, 0016,

0048, 0060, 0061,

0104, 0112, 0113,

0125, 0205, 0213

MIVAR 0200, 0201, 0202,

0203, 0204, 0207

MONTGOMERY WARD

0058

MTC 0060, 0061, 0128,

0200

MULTI SYSTEM

0217

MULTITECH 0062, 0127, 0128,

0200, 0207, 0208,

0210, 0214, 0215,

0217

MURPHY 0200, 0207

NAD 0061

NAONIS 0210

NEC 0026, 0053, 0060,

0061, 0096, 0127

NECKERMANN

0205, 0207, 0210,

0213, 0217, 0255

NEI 0213, 0217

NESCO 0214

NET-TV 0082, 0101

NEW TECH 0208, 0213

NEW WORLD 0209, 0218

NICAMAGIC 0200, 0207

NIKKAI 0200, 0206, 0207,

0209, 0213, 0217,

0218

NIKKO 0061

NOBLIKO 0200, 0207

NOGAMATIC 0216

NOKIA 0129, 0211

NORDMENDE

0205, 0211, 0213,

0216

NORDVISION 0217

OCEANIC 0211

OLEVIA 0052, 0084

ONCEAS 0207

ONWA 0062, 0218

ORBIT 0213

ORION 0126, 0204, 0208,

0213, 0217, 0235

ORLINE 0218

ORSOWE 0204

OSAKI 0127, 0206, 0207,

0209, 0218

OSIO 0201

OSO 0209, 0218

OSUME 0218

OTTO VERSAND

0204, 0207, 0213,

0215, 0216, 0217,

0255

PAEL 0200, 0207

PALLADIUM 0207

PANAMA 0200, 0206, 0207,

0208

PANASONIC 0006, 0007, 0063,

0073, 0074, 0097,

0110, 0114, 0137,

0141, 0151, 0162,

0165, 0186, 0204,

0211, 0244, 0245,

0246, 0254

PATHE CINEMA

0200, 0203, 0207,

0212, 0215

PATHE MARCONI

0212, 0216

PAUSA 0208

PERDIO 0200

PHILCO 0060, 0061, 0063,

0128, 0205, 0214,

0215

PHILHARMONIC

0207

PHILIPS 0040, 0060, 0063,

0072, 0115, 0116,

0124, 0130, 0150,

0175, 0184, 0187,

0205, 0207, 0213,

0215, 0217, 0220,

0221, 0232, 0233,

0252, 0253

PHILIPS MAGNAVOX

0124

PHOENIX 0200, 0205, 0213,

0217

PHONOLA 0200, 0205, 0213,

0217

PILOT 0060

PIONEER 0012, 0013, 0060,

0061, 0098, 0109,

0117, 0128, 0181,

0182, 0194, 0195,

0211, 0213, 0216,

0217, 0250

PLANTRON 0206, 0213

POLAROID 0075

POPPY 0208

PORTLAND 0060, 0061

PRANDONI-PRINCE

0204, 0210

PRECISION 0207

PRIMA 0208, 0211

PROFEX 0208

PROFI-TRONIC

0213

PROLINE 0213

PROSCAN 0057

PROSONIC 0200, 0207, 0217

PROTECH 0206, 0207, 0208,

0213, 0214, 0215,

0217

PROTON 0060, 0061

PROVIEW 0050

PROVISION 0217

PULSAR 0060

PYE 0213, 0217

PYMI 0208

QUASAR 0152, 0214

QUELLE 0201, 0206, 0207,

0213, 0214, 0215,

0217

RADIALVA 0218

RADIO SHACK

0064

RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC

0057, 0060, 0061,

0062, 0064

RADIOLA 0213, 0217

RADIOMARELLI

0204, 0205, 0214

RADIOTONE 0213

RCA 0057, 0060, 0061,

0091, 0133, 0135,

0147, 0149

REALISTIC 0064

REVOX 0213, 0217

REX 0206, 0210, 0211

RFT 0203, 0205

RHAPSODY 0200

R-LINE 0213, 0217

ROADSTAR 0206, 0208, 0209,

0218, 0237

ROBOTRON 0205

ROWA 0200

RTF 0205

SABA 0204, 0205, 0211,

0216

SACCS 0212

SAISHO 0204, 0206, 0207,

0208

SALORA 0201, 0204, 0210,

0211, 0215

SAMBERS 0204

SAMPO 0060, 0061, 0083,

0101

SAMSUNG 0029, 0030, 0031,

0032, 0044, 0045,

0046, 0047, 0060,

0061, 0065, 0068,

0069, 0071, 0079,

0087, 0127, 0128,

0130, 0144, 0160,

0161, 0170, 0176,

0183, 0185, 0200,

0201, 0206, 0207,

0208, 0213, 0217,

0239, 0241, 0242,

0243

SANDRA 0200, 0207

SANSUI 0123, 0126, 0213

SANYO 0020, 0021, 0022,

0049, 0060, 0064,

0127, 0128, 0200,

0203, 0207, 0215

SBR 0217

SCHAUB LORENTZ

0211

SCHNEIDER 0207, 0209, 0213,

0215, 0216, 0217,

0218

SCOTCH 0061

SCOTT 0060, 0061, 0062

SEARS 0057, 0060, 0061,

0064

SEG 0200, 0206, 0207,

0214, 0215, 0217

SEI 0204

SEI-SINUDYNE

0204, 0205, 0211

SELECO 0210, 0211, 0215

SENCORA 0208

SENTRA 0218

SERINO 0200

SHARP 0009, 0010, 0011,

0060, 0061, 0066,

0070, 0087, 0111,

0143, 0145, 0167,

0168, 0169, 0198,

0204, 0224, 0247,

0248, 0249

SHOGUN 0060

SIAREM 0204, 0205, 0215

SICATEL 0212

SIEMENS 0255

SIERRA 0213

SIGNATURE 0058

SILVA 0200

SINGER 0205, 0214, 0215

SINUDYNE 0204, 0205, 0215,

0217

SKANTIC 0211

SOLAVOX 0211

SONOKO 0206, 0207, 0208,

0213, 0217

SONOLOR 0211

SONTEC 0213, 0217

SONY 0041, 0059, 0067,

0085, 0086, 0174,

0196, 0199, 0208,

0219, 0234

SOUND & VISION

0209, 0218

SOUNDESIGN 0060, 0061, 0062

SOUNDWAVE 0213, 0217

SSS 0060, 0062

STANDARD 0207, 0208, 0209,

0213, 0218

STARLIGHT 0217

STARLITE 0062

STENWAY 0218

STERN 0210, 0211

SUNKAI 0208, 0218

SUNWOOD 0208, 0213

SUPERLA 0200, 0204, 0207

SUPERTECH 0200

SUPRA 0208

SUPREME 0059

SUSUMU 0209

SUTRON 0208

SYDNEY 0200, 0207

SYLVANIA 0060, 0061, 0063,

0080, 0134, 0142,

0148

SYMPHONIC 0062, 0080

SYSLINE 0217

SYTONG 0200

TANDY 0127, 0207, 0209,

0211, 0218

TASHIKO 0200, 0207, 0210

TATUNG 0127, 0204, 0207,

0213, 0217, 0237

TCM 0206, 0208

TEAC 0127

TEC 0207, 0208, 0214,

0215

TECHWOOD 0060, 0061

TEKNIKA 0058, 0060, 0061,

0062

TELEAVIA 0216

TELECOR 0218

TELEFUNKEN

0065, 0213, 0216

TELEGAZI 0218

TELETECH 0208, 0214, 0217

TELETON 0207

TELEVIDEON 0200

TENSAI 0208, 0209, 0213,

0218

TESMET 0213

TEVION 0206, 0208

TEXET 0200, 0207

THOMSON 0191, 0192, 0207,

0213, 0216, 0226

THORN 0212, 0217

TMK 0060, 0061

TOKAI 0213

TOKYO 0200, 0207

TOSHIBA 0027, 0043, 0053,

0054, 0064, 0078,

0089, 0090, 0106,

0107, 0127, 0131,

0140, 0146, 0159,

0197, 0225, 0231,

0237

TOWADA 0211, 0215

TRANSTEC 0200

TRIDENT 0204

TRISTAR 0218

TRIUMPH 0204

UHER 0211, 0213

ULTRAVOX 0200, 0205, 0207,

0214, 0215

UNITED 0217

UNIVERSUM 0127, 0128, 0129,

0201, 0206, 0213,

0214, 0215, 0217

UNIVOX 0212

VESTEL 0210, 0211, 0213,

0214, 0215, 0217

VEXA 0208, 0217

VICTOR 0213

VIDEOLOGIC 0200

VIDEOLOGIQUE

0200, 0207, 0209,

0218

VIDEOSAT 0214

VIDEOSYSTEM

0213

VIDEOTECHNIC

0200

VIDTECH 0060, 0061

VIEWSONIC 0076, 0077, 0092,

0099, 0172, 0173

VISIOLA 0200, 0207

VISION 0213

VORTEC 0213, 0217

VOXSON 0205, 0210, 0211,

0213

WALTHAM 0207, 0212

WARDS 0057, 0058, 0060,

0061, 0063

WATSON 0213, 0217, 0218

WATT RADIO 0200, 0207, 0212,

0215

WEGA 0205

WELTBLICK 0213, 0217

WESTON 0215

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0008, 0200, 0207,

0217

WINCOM 0055, 0056

YAMAHA 0000, 0001, 0002,

0003, 0005, 0060,

0061

YAMISHI 0218

YOKO 0200, 0206, 0207,

0208, 0209, 0213,

0217, 0218

YORX 0209, 0218

ZANUSSI 0210

ZENITH 0058, 0060, 0100,

0105, 0119, 0121,

0154

TV/DVD COMBO

AIWA 0139, 2055

APEX 0132, 2049

BROKSONIC 0138, 2060

BUSH 0230, 2112

JVC 0136, 2053

PANASONIC 0137, 2054, 0254,

2110

RCA 0133, 0135, 2050,

2051

SYLVANIA 0134, 2052

THOMSON 0226, 2109

TOSHIBA 0131, 2048, 0231,

2111

TV/DVD/VCR COMBO

PANASONIC 0141, 1040, 2057

SAMSUNG 0241, 1070, 2113

SHARP 0143, 1028, 2059

SYLVANIA 0142, 1041, 2058

TOSHIBA 0140, 1029, 2056

TV/VCR COMBO

AIWA 0237, 1066

BUSH 0237, 1066

DAEWOO 0155, 0238, 1038,

1067

GE 0147, 1030

GOODMANS 0240, 1069

GRUNDIG 0236, 1062

HITACHI 0156, 1039

JVC 0153, 1036

MAGNAVOX 0150, 1033

ORION 0235, 1065

PANASONIC 0151, 1034

PHILIPS 0150, 0232, 0233,

1033, 1062, 1063

QUASAR 0152, 1035

RCA 0149, 1032

ROADSTAR 0237, 1066

SAMSUNG 0144, 0239, 1027,

1068

SHARP 0145, 1028

SONY 0234, 1064

SYLVANIA 0148, 1031

TATUNG 0237, 1066

TOSHIBA 0146, 0237, 1029,

1066

ZENITH 0154, 1037

DVD/VCR COMBO

JVC 1017, 1017, 2045,

2045

LG 1071, 2087

PANASONIC 1020, 1072, 2040,

2105

PHILIPS 1025, 2046

RCA 1022, 2042

SAMSUNG 1021, 1021, 2041,

2104

SHARP 1023, 1073, 2043,

2106

SONY 1019, 1074, 2039,

2107

TOSHIBA 1024, 1075, 2044,

2108

ZENITH 1026, 2047

VCR

ADMIRAL 1008, 1013

ADVENTURA

1005

AIWA 1005, 1042, 1043,

1044, 1066

AKAI 1007, 1043

AKIBA 1050

AKURA 1043, 1050

ALBA 1044, 1050

AMERICAN HIGH

1004

AMSTRAD 1042

ANITECH 1050

ASA 1045, 1046

ASHA 1002, 1014

ASUKA 1042, 1045, 1046,

1050

AUDIO DYNAMICS

1000

AUDIOVOX 1003

BAIRD 1042, 1043, 1047

BASIC LINE 1044, 1050

BAUR 1046

BEAUMARK 1002, 1014

BELL & HOWELL

1001

BLAUPUNKT 1046, 1048

BROKSONIC 1012, 1013

BUSH 1044, 1050, 1066

CALIX 1003

CANDLE 1002, 1003

CANON 1004

CCE 1006

CGE 1042, 1043

CIMLINE 1044, 1050

CITIZEN 1002, 1003

COLORTYME 1000

COLT 1006

CRAIG 1002, 1003, 1006,

1014

CROWN 1050

CURTIS MATHES

1000, 1002, 1004,

1009

CYBERNEX 1002, 1014

DAEWOO 1005, 1038, 1061,

1067

DANSAI 1050

DANTAX 1044

DBX 1000

DE GRAAF 1046, 1049

DECCA 1042, 1043, 1046

DENON 1010

DIMENSIA 1009

DUAL 1043, 1046

DUMONT 1042, 1046, 1047,

1049

DYNATECH 1005

ELECTROHOME

1003

ELECTROPHONIC

1003

ELTA 1050

APPENDIX

EMERSON 1003, 1004, 1005,

1012, 1013

ETZUKO 1050

FERGUSON 1043

FIDELITY 1042

FINLANDIA 1046, 1047, 1049

FINLUX 1042, 1043, 1046,

1047, 1049

FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049,

1050

FISHER 1001, 1047

FLINT 1044

FORMENTI/PHOENIX

1046

FUJI 1004

FUJITSU 1042

FUNAI 1005, 1042

GALAXY 1042

GARRARD 1005

GBC 1050

GE 1002, 1004, 1009,

1014, 1030

GEC 1046

GELOSO 1050

GENERAL TECHNIC

1044, 1048

GO VIDEO 1014

GOLDHAND 1050

GOLDSTAR 1000, 1003, 1042,

1045

GOODMANS 1042, 1045, 1050,

1069

GRADIENTE 1005

GRAETZ 1043, 1047

GRANADA 1046, 1047, 1049

GRANDIN 1042, 1045, 1050

GRUNDIG 1046, 1050, 1062

HANSEATIC 1045, 1046

HARLEY DAVIDSON

1005

HARMAN/KARDON

1000

HARWOOD 1006

HCM 1050

HEADQUARTER

1001

HINARI 1044, 1050

HISAWA 1044

HITACHI 1007, 1010, 1039,

1042, 1043, 1046,

1049

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

1010

HYPSON 1044, 1050

IMPERIAL 1042

INNO HIT 1046, 1050

INNOVATION 1044, 1048

INSTANT REPLAY

1004

INTERBUY 1045

INTERFUNK 1046, 1047

INTERVISION 1042

IRRADIO 1045, 1050

ITT 1043, 1047

ITV 1045

JC PENNEY 1000, 1001, 1002,

1003, 1004, 1006

JCL 1004

JENSEN 1007

JVC 1000, 1001, 1007,

1011, 1017, 1036,

1043

KAISUI 1050

KARCHER 1046

KENDO 1044

KENWOOD 1000, 1001, 1007,

1011, 1043

KLH 1006

KODAK 1003, 1004

KORPEL 1050

LEYCO 1050

LG 1003, 1042, 1045,

1071

LIFETEC 1044, 1048

LLOYD'S 1005

LOEWE 1048

LOEWE OPTA 1045, 1046

LOGIK 1006, 1050

LUXOR 1047

LXI 1003

M ELECTRONIC

1042

MAGNASONIC

1047

MAGNAVOX 1004, 1018, 1033

MAGNIN 1003, 1014

MANESTH 1050

MARANTZ 1000, 1001, 1004,

1046, 1051

MARTA 1003

MATSUI 1044, 1045

MATSUSHITA 1004

MEDIATOR 1046

MEDION 1044, 1048

MEI 1004

MEMOREX 1001, 1002, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1008,

1013, 1014, 1042,

1045, 1047

MEMPHIS 1050

METZ 1048

MGA 1014

MGN TECHNOLOGY

1002, 1014

MICROMAXX 1044, 1048

MICROSTAR 1044, 1048

MIGROS 1042

MINOLTA 1010

MITSUBISHI 1011, 1042, 1046

MONTGOMERY WARD

1008

MOTOROLA 1004, 1008

MTC 1002, 1014

MULTITECH 1002, 1005, 1006,

1042, 1046, 1050

MURPHY 1042

NATIONAL 1048

NEC 1000, 1001, 1007,

1011, 1043, 1051

NECKERMANN

1043, 1046

NEI 1046

NESCO 1050

NIKKO 1003

NOBLEX 1002, 1014

NOKIA 1043, 1047

NORDMENDE

1043

OCEANIC 1042, 1043

OKANO 1044

OLYMPUS 1004

OPTIMUS 1003, 1008

ORION 1012, 1013, 1044,

1065

ORSON 1042

OSAKI 1042, 1045, 1050

OTTO VERSAND

1046

PALLADIUM 1043, 1045, 1050

PANASONIC 1004, 1020, 1034,

1040, 1048, 1054,

1072

PATHE MARCONI

1043

PENNEY 1010, 1014

PENTAX 1010, 1049

PERDIO 1042

PHILCO 1004, 1051

PHILIPS 1004, 1025, 1033,

1046, 1056, 1057,

1059, 1062, 1063

PHILIPS MAGNAVOX

1018

PHONOLA 1046

PILOT 1003

PIONEER 1011, 1046

PRINZ 1042

PROFEX 1050

PROFITRONIC

1014

PROLINE 1042

PROSCAN 1009

PROSONIC 1044

PROTEC 1006

PYE 1046, 1056

QUARTER 1001

QUARTZ 1001, 1047

QUASAR 1004, 1035

QUELLE 1042, 1046, 1047

RADIO SHACK

1003

RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC

1001, 1002, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1008

RADIOLA 1046

RADIX 1003

RANDEX 1003

RCA 1002, 1004, 1009,

1010, 1014, 1015,

1022, 1032

REALISTIC 1001, 1002, 1003,

1004, 1005, 1008

REX 1043

RFT 1046

ROADSTAR 1045, 1050, 1066

SABA 1043

SAISHO 1044, 1050

SALORA 1047

SAMSUNG 1002, 1014, 1021,

1027, 1052, 1068,

1070

SANKY 1008

SANSUI 1007, 1011, 1013,

1043

SANYO 1001, 1002, 1014,

1047

SBR 1046

SCHAUB LORENZ

1042, 1043, 1047

SCHNEIDER 1042, 1044, 1045,

1046, 1050

SCOTT 1012

SEARS 1001, 1003, 1004,

1010

SEG 1050

SEI-SINUDYNE

1046

SELECO 1043

SENTRON 1050

SHARP 1008, 1023, 1028,

1053, 1073

SHINTOM 1006, 1047, 1050

SHIVAKI 1045

SHOGUN 1002, 1014

SIEMENS 1045, 1047

SIGNATURE 2000

1008

SILVA 1045

SINGER 1004, 1006

SINUDYNE 1046

SONTEC 1045

SONY 1016, 1019, 1055,

1060, 1064, 1074

STS 1004, 1010

SUNKAI 1044

SUNSTAR 1042

SUNTRONIC 1042

SUNWOOD 1050

SYLVANIA 1004, 1005, 1031,

1041

SYMPHONIC 1005

TAISHO 1044

TANDY 1001

TASHIKO 1003, 1042

TATUNG 1007, 1042, 1043,

1046, 1066

TCM 1044, 1048

TEAC 1005, 1007

TECHNICS 1004, 1048

TEKNIKA 1003, 1004, 1005

TELEAVIA 1043

TELEFUNKEN

1043

TENOSAL 1050

TENSAI 1042, 1045, 1050

TEVION 1044, 1048

THOMSON 1043, 1058

THORN 1043, 1047

TMK 1002, 1014

TOKAI 1045, 1050

TONSAI 1050

TOSHIBA 1013, 1024, 1029,

1043, 1046, 1066,

1075

TOTEVISION 1002, 1003, 1014

TOWADA 1050

TOWIKA 1050

UHER 1045

UNITECH 1002, 1014

UNIVERSUM 1042, 1045, 1046

VECTOR RESEARCH

1000

VIDEO CONCEPTS

1000

VIDEON 1044, 1048

VIDEOSONIC 1002, 1014

WARDS 1002, 1003, 1004,

1005, 1006, 1008,

1010, 1014

WELTBLICK 1045

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

1013

XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006

YAMAHA 1000, 1001, 1007

YAMISHI 1050

YOKAN 1050

YOKO 1045, 1050

ZENITH 1013, 1026, 1037

DVD

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

2078

AIWA 2055, 2100

AKAI 2096

AKURA 2076

ALBA 2078, 2086

APEX 2027, 2049

AWA 2078

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in China

WJ63840

AXION 2078

BRAINWAVE 2096

BRANDT 2073, 2085

BROKSONIC 2060

BUSH 2075, 2078, 2112

CENTREX 2077

CLASSIC 2078

CLATRONIC 2075

COBY 2078

C-TECH 2074

CYBERHOME

2025, 2079, 2091

DAEWOO 2092, 2098

DANSAI 2096

DAYTEK 2080, 2089

DEC 2075

DENON 2030, 2102, 2103

DENVER 2075, 2076

DIAMOND 2074

DK DIGITAL 2094

DUAL 2078

D-VISION 2096

DVX 2074

ELTA 2096

EUROLINE 2096

FUNAI 2052, 2058

GLOBAL SOLUTIONS

2074

GLOBAL SPHERE

2074

GOODMANS 2075, 2077, 2078

GRUNDIG 2077, 2098

H&B 2075

HAAZ 2074

HE 2078

HITACHI 2032, 2072

HOME ELECTRONICS

2078

INNOVATION 2072

IRRADIO 2134

JDB 2078

JVC 2033, 2045, 2053,

2073, 2099

KENWOOD 2030, 2097

KINGAVON 2075

KODA 2075

LAWSON 2074

LENCO 2075

LG 2084, 2087

LIFETEC 2072

LIMIT 2074

LOGICLAB 2074

LUXOR 2077

MAGNAVOX 2037, 2073, 2075

MAGNUM 2072

MBO 2078

MEDION 2072

MICROMAXX

2072

MICROMEDIA

2073

MICROSTAR 2072

MITSUBISHI 2035

MIZUDA 2075

MUSTEK 2078

NAIKO 2077

ONKYO 2073, 2135

ORAVA 2075

P&B 2075

PACIFIC 2074

PANASONIC 2030, 2040, 2054,

2057, 2105, 2110

PHILIPS 2019, 2026, 2046,

2073, 2081, 2090

PIONEER 2036, 2082

PROLINE 2077

PROVISION 2075

RCA 2031, 2042, 2050,

2051

RED STAR 2076

REOC 2074

ROADSTAR 2075, 2078, 2086

ROWA 2077

SABA 2085

SABAKI 2074

SAMSUNG 2032, 2041, 2104,

2113

SANSUI 2074

SANYO 2095

SCANMAGIC 2078

SCIENTIFIC LABS

2074

SCOTT 2088

SEG 2074, 2086

SHARP 2034, 2043, 2059,

2093, 2106

SILVA 2076

SINGER 2074

SKYMASTER 2074, 2078

SKYWORTH 2076

SM ELECTRONIC

2074, 2078

SONY 2028, 2029, 2039,

2083, 2107

SOUNDMASTER

2074

SOUNDMAX 2074

STANDARD 2074

STAR CLUSTER

2074

STARMEDIA 2075

SUPERVISION

2074, 2078

SYLVANIA 2052, 2058

SYNN 2074

TCM 2072

TEAC 2074

TEC 2076

TECHNICS 2030

TECHNIKA 2096

TECHNOSONIC

2096

TEVION 2072, 2074

THOMSON 2085, 2109

TOKAI 2076

TOSHIBA 2026, 2044, 2048,

2056, 2073, 2108,

2111

UNITED 2078

VOXSON 2078

WHARFEDALE

2074

XLOGIC 2074

YAKUMO 2077

YAMADA 2077

YAMAHA 2000, 2001, 2003,

2030, 2101

YUKAI 2078

ZENITH 2038, 2047, 2073

DVD-DVR

PANASONIC 2067

PIONEER 2114

SAMSUNG 2115

TOSHIBA 2068

DVD/LD COMBO

PIONEER 2036

DVD RECORDER

APEX 2024

JVC 2070

LG 2071

PANASONIC 2020, 2065, 2066,

2067

PHILIPS 2019, 2061, 2062,

2063

PIONEER 2021

RCA 2018

SONY 2022, 2064

TOSHIBA 2068

YAMAHA 2023

YUKAI 2069

DVR

ABS 2132

ALIENWARE 2132

CYBERPOWER

2132

DELL 2132

DIRECTV 2123, 2128, 2129,

2133

DISH NETWORK

2126, 2127

DISHPRO 2126

ECHOSTAR 2126, 2127

EXPRESSVU 2126

GATEWAY 2132

GOI 2126

HEWLETT PACKARD

2132

HITACHI 2008

HOWARD COMPUTERS

2132

HTS 2126

HUGHES 2123, 2128

HUMAX 2123

HUSH 2132

IBUYPOWER 2132

JVC 2126, 2127

LINKSYS 2132

MEDIA CENTER PC

2132

MICROSOFT 2132

MIND 2132

NIVEUS MEDIA

2132

NORTHGATE 2132

PANASONIC 2015, 2016, 2017,

2120

PHILIPS 2117, 2121, 2123,

2128

PIONEER 2012, 2013, 2014

PROSCAN 2129

RCA 2116, 2124, 2129,

2133

REPLAYTV 2118, 2119, 2120

SHARP 2009, 2010

SONIC BLUE 2119, 2120

SONY 2005, 2006, 2007,

2122, 2130, 2131,

2132

STACK 9 2132

SYSTEMAX 2132

TAGAR SYSTEMS

2132

TIVO 2116, 2121, 2122,

2123, 2130, 2131

TOSHIBA 2004, 2125, 2132

TOUCH 2132

ULTIMATETV 2133

VIEWSONIC 2132

VOODOO 2132

YAMAHA 2011

ZT GROUP 2132

LD PLAYER

YAMAHA 2002

CD PLAYER

YAMAHA 5000, 5013

CD RECORDER

YAMAHA 5001

YAMAHA 5002, 5003, 5004

TAPE DECK

YAMAHA 5005, 5006

TUNER

YAMAHA 5007, 5008, 5009,

5010, 5012, 5014

OTHER AUDIO

ACCESSORIES

YAMAHA 5011

(iPod)

01EN_HTR-6030_U_cv-4.fm Page vii Tuesday, December 19, 2006 11:14 AM

The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.

■ Front panel

HTR-6030

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

A/B/OFF

PRESET/TUNING/CH

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

FM/AM

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

MEMORY

DISPLAY

TUNING AUTO/MAN'L

AUDIO SELECT

NIGHTSTRAIGHT

EFFECT

TONE CONTROL

l INPUT hl PROGRAM h

VOLUME

SCENE

1234

VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE

VIDEO AUX

1 7634 5

90 DAC EFB

00_Sheet_HTR-6030_U.book Page 1 Thursday, December 28, 2006 10:19 AM

■ Remote control

REC

SUR.DECODE NIGHT

STRAIGHTENHANCERl PROG h

TV MUTE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

POWER

AMP

STANDBY

POWER

AUDIO SEL

SLEEP MUTE

MULTI CH IN

POWER

4321

ENT.

DVD

V-AUX XM

DTV/CBL DVR

CD MD/CD-R

TUNER

SRCH MODE

VOLUME

TITLE

ENTER

BAND LEVEL

DISPLAY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

AVTV

SCENE

4321

WK14310

Printed in China

00_Sheet_HTR-6030_U.book Page i Thursday, December 28, 2006 10:19 AM

Transcripción de documentos

01EN_HTR-6030_U_cv-1.fm Page 1 Tuesday, December 19, 2006 11:00 AM U HTR-6030 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Important safety instructions 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. Caution-i En 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, Important safety instructions d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-ii En CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. Caution-iii En 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are 110–120/220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by STANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Contents Features ................................................................... 2 Getting started ........................................................ 3 Quick start guide .................................................... 4 PREPARATION Connections ........................................................... 10 Using set menu ........................................................ 44 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 45 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 48 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 50 Remote control features........................................51 Using remote control on the SCENE feature........... 51 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 52 Setting remote control codes ................................... 54 Advanced setup......................................................55 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Troubleshooting.....................................................56 Glossary..................................................................61 Specifications .........................................................63 Index .......................................................................64 APPENDIX BASIC OPERATION (at the end of this manual) Front panel................................................................i Remote control ....................................................... ii List of remote control codes ................................. iii Basic setup ............................................................. 21 BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION Rear panel ................................................................ 10 Placing speakers....................................................... 11 Connecting speakers ................................................ 12 Setting the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ....................... 13 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 14 Connecting video components................................. 15 Connecting audio components................................. 17 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 18 Connecting the power cable..................................... 18 Turning on and off the power .................................. 18 Front panel display .................................................. 19 Set menu.................................................................43 PREPARATION Preparation: Check the items ..................................... 4 Step 1: Set up your speakers...................................... 5 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components............................................ 6 Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button ........................................... 8 What do you want to do with this unit?..................... 9 ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Selecting the SCENE templates........................... 23 Playback ................................................................ 27 Basic operations....................................................... 27 Additional operations............................................... 28 Sound field programs ........................................... 31 Sound field program descriptions............................ 31 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 34 XM Satellite Radio tuning ................................... 37 Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock .................... 37 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 38 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 38 Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............ 40 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 41 Recording .............................................................. 42 • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “1 STANDBY/ON” or “A MULTI CH IN” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the top pages of this manual for the information about each position of the parts. • The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the corresponding reference page(s). APPENDIX Automatic tuning ..................................................... 34 Manual tuning.......................................................... 34 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 35 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 35 Selecting preset stations........................................... 36 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 36 About this manual ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting the desired SCENE template.................... 23 Creating your original SCENE templates................ 26 English 1 En Features Features Built-in 5-channel power amplifier Sophisticated FM/AM tuner ◆ Minimum RMS output power ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 100 W + 100 W Center: 100 W Surround: 100 W + 100 W [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) Front: 100 W + 100 W Center: 100 W Surround: 100 W + 100 W SCENE select function ◆ Preset SCENE templates for various situations ◆ 4 original SCENE templates for customizing capability Decoders and DSP circuits ◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of multichannel surround sound ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo ◆ Dolby Digital decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder ◆ DTS decoder ◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM MiniTuner Dock” sold separately) ◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the XM HD content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience Other features ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ Component video input/output capability (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. 2 En Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. Getting started Getting started ■ Installing batteries in the remote control Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control POWER TV POWER STANDBY POWER MUTE Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) 1 AM loop antenna 3 AV MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR TV CH TV MUTE TV VOL V-AUX XM AMP TV INPUT 1 2 INTRODUCTION ■ Checking the supplied accessories SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 4 SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU 2 Indoor FM antenna ENTER RETURN XM MEMORY DISPLAY REC l 1 PROG h 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT. Note 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) Caution The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Select the switch position (upper or lower) according to your local voltage using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are 110-120/220-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. VOLTAGE SELECTOR 110V120V 220V240V Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following condition: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. • Do not use an old battery and a new one together. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control code. English 3 En Quick start guide Quick start guide The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater. Video monitor Front right speaker In these steps, you need the following supplied accessories. Subwoofer Front left speaker Preparation: Check the items Surround right speaker ❏ Indoor FM antenna ❏ AM loop antenna The following items are not included in the package of this unit. Center speaker ❏ Speakers ❏ Front speakers ...................................... 2 DVD player ❏ Center speaker ...................................... 1 Surround left speaker ❏ Surround speakers ............................... 2 Select magnetically shielded speakers. The minimum required speakers are two front speakers. ❏ Active subwoofer ...................................... 1 Step 1: Set up your speakers Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA input jack. ❏ Speaker cables .......................................... 5 ☞ P. 5 ❏ Subwoofer cable ........................................ 1 Select a monaural RCA cable. ❏ DVD player ................................................. 1 Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components ☞ P. 6 Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital audio output jack and composite video output jack. ❏ Video monitor ............................................. 1 Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector equipped with a composite video input jack. ❏ Video cable ................................................ 1 Select an RCA composite video cable. ❏ Digital coaxial audio cable ....................... 1 Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button ☞ P. 8 Enjoy DVD playback! 4 En Quick start guide Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. Step 1: Set up your speakers Front speakers XM ANTENNA Loosen SPEAKERS SURROUND R L CENTER Insert INTRODUCTION Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. Tighten FRONT B R L COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN MONITOR OUT DVR OUT FM 75 OPTICAL CD 3 Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT DTV/ CBL 2 DVD 1 COAXIAL SURROUND AUDIO DVD CENTER L L R R DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT OUTPUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER R FRONT A SUBWOOFER L 1 Place your speakers and subwoofer in the room. 2 Connect speaker cables to each speaker. Front left speaker To the front right speaker Center and surround speakers Release Insert Press down Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 3 Connect each speaker cable to the corresponding speaker terminal of this unit. 1 2 3 To the surround right speaker 4 To the center speaker To the surround left speaker 1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables together to prevent short circuits. 3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other. 4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal part of this unit. 4 Connect the subwoofer cable to the input jack of the subwoofer and the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack of this unit. Subwoofer AV receiver OUTPUT IN (PLAY) MD/ OUT CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack Subwoofer cable 5 En English Input jack Quick start guide Step 2: Connect your DVD player and other components XM 2 Connect the video cable to the composite video output jack of your DVD player and the DVD VIDEO jack of this unit. AV receiver SPEAKERS ANTENNA SURROUND R CENTER L FRONT B R L COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL MONITOR OUT DVR AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT FM 75 DVD player OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND AUDIO CENTER L DVD L IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER 1 R COAXIAL OUTPUT CD R R FRONT A SUBWOOFER L Make sure that this unit and the DVD player are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. DVD VIDEO jack Composite video output jack 3 1 Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack of this unit. DVD player Video cable Connect the video cable to the video input jack of your video monitor and the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. Video monitor AV receiver AV receiver L/MONO S-VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO-1 IN AUDIO R Y PB PR L/MONO COLOR STREAM HD IN R AUDIO Video input jack Video cable Digital coaxial audio output jack Digital coaxial audio cable 6 En DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack Quick start guide 4 ■ For further connections • Using the other kind of speaker combinations ☞ P. 11 • Connecting a video monitor and DVD player ☞ P. 15 • Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner and DVD recorder INTRODUCTION Connect the FM and AM antennas to this unit. See page 18 for the details. ☞ P. 15 • Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ☞ P. 16 Indoor FM antenna AM loop antenna • Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel ☞ P. 16 • Connecting a CD player and an MD recorder ☞ P. 17 • Connecting a DVD player via analog multi-channel audio connection ☞ P. 17 Press and hold Insert Release • Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna ☞ P. 18 • Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock ☞ P. 37 y The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND terminal. 5 Connect the power plug of this unit and other components into the AC wall outlet. English 7 En Quick start guide Step 3: Turn on the power and press SCENE 1 button Check the type of the connected speakers. If the speakers are 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 13). 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel. 4 Start playback of the desired DVD on your player. 5 Rotate 8 VOLUME to adjust the volume. Note When you change the input source or sound field program, the SCENE mode is deactivated and the indicator on the SCENE button turns off. ■ Using the other SCENE buttons In the following cases, try pressing the corresponding SCENE button to enjoy playback of the desired sources. Case A: “I want to listen to a music disc from the connected DVD player as the back ground music for this room...” 3 Press F SCENE 1. “DVD Viewing” appears in the front panel display, and this unit automatically optimize own status for the DVD playback. Press F SCENE 2 (or E SCENE 2) to select “Disc Listening”. Case B: “I want to watch a TV program...” EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING FM / AM A/B/C/D/E CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E MEMORY Press F SCENE 3 (or E SCENE 3) to select “TV Viewing”. DISPLAY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L Note To use the “TV Viewing” template, you must connect a cable TV or satellite tuner to this unit in advance. See page 15 for details. y The indicator on the selected SCENE button lights up while this unit is in the SCENE mode. 8 En Quick start guide Case C: “I want to listen to a music program from the FM radio station...” Notes • To use the “Radio Listening” template, you must tune into the desired radio station in advance. See pages 34 to 36 for tuning information. • To achieve the best possible reception, orient the connected AM loop antenna, or adjust the position of the end of the indoor FM antenna. ■ Customizing the SCENE templates • Using various SCENE templates ☞ P. 23 ■ Using various input sources • Basic controls of this unit ☞ P. 27 y • Enjoying FM/AM radio programs If you cannot find the desired situation, you can select and change the assigned SCENE template for the SCENE buttons. See page 23 for details. • Enjoying XM Satellite Radio programs ☞ P. 34 ☞ P. 37 ■ After using this unit... Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. INTRODUCTION Press F SCENE 4 (or E SCENE 4) to select “Radio Listening”. What do you want to do with this unit? ■ Using various sound features • Using various sound field programs ☞ P. 31 ■ Adjusting the parameters of this unit • Optimizing the speaker parameters for your listening room (BASIC SETUP) ☞ P. 21 • Manually adjusting various parameters of this unit ☞ P. 43 • Setting the remote control ☞ P. 51 • Adjusts the advanced parameters This unit is set to the standby mode. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby mode, press 1 STANDBY/ ON (or L POWER) on the front panel. See page 18 for details. Note ☞ P. 55 ■ Additional features Automatically turning off this unit ☞ P. 30 In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. English 9 En Connections Connections Rear panel 1 2 3 4 XM 5 ANTENNA SPEAKERS SURROUND R L CENTER FRONT B R L COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVD DVR MONITOR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT FM 75 OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND AUDIO DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT OUTPUT CD IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER L 1 R COAXIAL DVD CENTER L R R FRONT A SUBWOOFER 6 7 8 9 L 0 (U.S.A. model) 1 XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) See page 37 for connection information. 8 AUDIO jacks See pages 15 and 17 for connection information. 2 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks See page 16 for connection information. 9 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack See page 12 for connection information. 3 VIDEO jacks See pages 15 for connection information. 0 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) See page 3 for details. 4 ANTENNA terminals See page 18 for connection information. 5 SPEAKERS terminals See page 12 for connection information. 6 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See page 17 for connection information. 7 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 17 for connection information. 10 En Connections Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multichannel audio sources. FL C FR FR SW 30˚ FL SR PREPARATION C SL SR SL 60˚ SL 80˚ SR 1.8 m (6 ft) Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. English 11 En Connections Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately. Caution • • • • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see page 13). Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off. Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. Front speakers (B) Right Left Surround speakers Right Left Center speaker XM ANTENNA SPEAKERS SURROUND R L CENTER FRONT B R L COMPONENT VIDEO DTV/CBL DVD DVR MONITOR OUT AM PR GND VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT FM 75 OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND AUDIO DVD COAXIAL DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT OUTPUT CD L IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) SUB WOOFER 1 R R R FRONT A SUBWOOFER L (U.S.A. model) Subwoofer ■ Before connecting to the SPEAKERS terminal A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 12 En Right Left Front speakers (A) Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the bare wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (3/8”) Connections ■ Connecting to the FRONT A terminals 2 1 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Caution If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 3 Loosen the knob. 2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into the hole on the terminal. 1 Make sure this unit is turned off. See page 18 for details about turning on or off this unit. 2 Press and hold 0 TONE CONTROL and then press 1 STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, an the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press A PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select “SP IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Connecting the banana plug (except Europe, Korea and Asia models) The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. PREPARATION 1 3 Setting the speaker impedance (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Banana plug SP IMP.- 8 MIN 4 ■ Connecting to the FRONT B, CENTER, and SURROUND terminals Press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “6Ω MIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. SP IMP.- 6 MIN Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 5 1 Press down the tab. Press 1 STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. 2 Insert the bare end of the speaker wire into the hole on the terminal. 3 Release the tab to secure the wire. English 13 En Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right analog audio cable plugs Coaxial digital audio cable plug Video jacks and cable plugs COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR VIDEO (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red) O V Y PB PR Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has two types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Notes COMPONENT VIDEO • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. All digital input jacks are compatible with digital signals with up to 96 kHz of sampling frequency. • This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input at the digital jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. 14 En Input VIDEO Output (MONITOR OUT) PR PR PB PB Y Y Connections Connecting video components Connect the video components as follows. y Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. You can also connect a video monitor, DVD player, digital TV, and cable TV to this unit using the COMPONENT VIDEO connection (see page 16). ■ Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner and a DVD recorder PREPARATION ■ Connecting a video monitor and a DVD player XM XM COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL DVR DVD MONITOR OUT DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT PR PR VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB MONITOR OUT DVR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT OPTICAL OPTICAL MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND DTV/ CBL 2 DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MULTI CH INPUT CD FRONT DVD R R CD 1 R COAXIAL R SUBWOOFER R V C Audio out Video in Audio out O V L Audio out L Video out V Video out AUDIO CENTER L SUBWOOFER Audio out SURROUND L L 1 COAXIAL Y AUDIO DVD CENTER L DVD 3 R V L R L R V Video in 2 CD Audio in DTV/ CBL Y Audio out 3 Video out CD DVD player Video monitor Cable TV or Satellite tuner DVD recorder indicates recommended connections indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections indicates alternative connections English 15 En Connections ■ Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ■ Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel You can enjoy high-quality pictures by connecting your video monitor and video source components to this unit using COMPONENT VIDEO connection. Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Note Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a COMPONENT VIDEO connection, connect your video source components to this unit using the COMPONENT VIDEO connection. Video monitor Caution Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Notes • To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. • The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take priority over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks. Video in Video out DVD player VOLUME STANDBY /ON EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E FM/AM Y l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY DISPLAY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 PB PR Y PB PR l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT h TONE CONTROL 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA VIDEO AUX VIDEO L V L AUDIO R PORTABLE COMPONENT VIDEO DVD DTV/CBL DVR MONITOR OUT PR PB R Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND CENTER Video output L Audio output R SUBWOOFER 16 En PR Y PB PR Video out PB Video out Y Cable TV or satellite tuner DVD recorder Game console or video camera 3.5 mm stereo mini plug Connections Connecting audio components Connect the audio components as follows. ■ Connecting a CD player and a CD recorder/MD recorder Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Note When you connect your CD player via analog and digital connection, priority is given to the signal input at the DIGITAL INPUT jack. PREPARATION VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT PB DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT MONITOR OUT FM 75 OPTICAL CD 3 DTV/ CBL 2 Y MULTI CH INPUT FRONT SURROUND AUDIO DVD DVD CENTER L DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) CD L 1 R R COAXIAL SUBWOOFER O L R Audio out L Audio out Audio out CD player R L R Audio in CD recorder or MD recorder indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, SURROUND L/R, CENTER and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. MULTI CH INPUT DTV/ CBL FRONT SURROUND Notes CENTER 2 L • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 28), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. 1 R R L R Center out Front out L Subwoofer out SUBWOOFER Surround out DVD COAXIAL English Multi-format player or external decoder 17 En Connections Connecting the FM and AM antennas Connecting the power cable Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Power cable (U.S.A. model) Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft) of vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. AM loop antenna (supplied) Indoor FM antenna (supplied) To the AC wall outlet ANTENNA Turning on and off the power AM ■ Turning on this unit GND FM 75 UNBAL. IN MD/ (PLAY) CD-R Press 1 STANDBY/ON (or L POWER) to turn on this unit. y When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. ■ Set this unit to the standby mode Ground For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 18 En Press 1 STANDBY/ON (or M STANDBY) to set this unit to the standby mode. In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. Connections Front panel display 1 2 3 5 4 DVR t VIRTUAL ENHANCER V-AUX SP SILENT CINEMA NIGHT AB DTV/CBL 6 MD/CD-R DVD TUNER 7 CD q PL HiFi DSP ft q PL 0 A B 1 Decoder indicator Lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions. 2 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is selected (see page 31). 3 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 33). 4 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 33). 5 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 6 Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite Radio tuning mode (see pages 34 and 37). C D E VOLUME dB LFE L C R SL SR F B NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 28). C CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 31). HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 31). D Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. E SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 30). F Input channel and speaker indicators LFE LFE indicator 7 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 28). L C R SL SR 8 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. 9 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 0 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 28). PREPARATION mS dB neural 9 XM AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY PRESET SLEEP MUTE q DIGITAL PCM 8 Input channel indicators Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. A SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected (see page 27). English 19 En Connections ■ Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. VOLUME STANDBY /ON EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING FM/AM CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY DISPLAY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF TONE CONTROL PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT h 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 30º 30º Approximately 6 m (20 ft) X Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. y To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 54. Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places 20 En Basic setup Basic setup The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. Notes 1 Press D AMP on the remote control. 2 Press P MENU. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. 5 SUBWOOFER .. YES . BASIC SETUP 3 Choices: YES, NONE • Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your system. • Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in your system. Press G ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”. “ROOM” appears in the front panel display. 6 ROOM: 4 S >M L Press Gl / h to select the desired setting. Select the size of the room where you have installed your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined as follows: Press Gn to select “SUBWOOFER” and then Gl / h to select the desired setting. PREPARATION • Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit. • If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see page 45). • Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 45). • Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. • Press HRETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level. Press Gn to select “SPEAKERS” and then Gl / h to select the number of speakers connected to this unit. SPEAKERS..5spk Choice Display Speakers Choices: S, M, L [U.S.A. and Canada models] S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft2 (4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2) M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft2 (6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2) L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft2 (7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m2) [Other models] S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m2 M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2 L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2 2spk L R 3spk L C R 4spk L SL R SR 5spk L C R SL SR Front L/R Front L/R, Center Front L/R, Surround L/R Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R English 21 En Basic setup 7 Press G n to select “SET” and then G l / h to select the desired setting. SET 10 Press G ENTER to confirm your selection. • If you selected “YES” in step 9, the setup procedure is completed and the display returns to the top set menu display. • If you selected “NO” in step 9, the front speaker level adjustment display appears in the front panel display. 11 Press Gk / n to select a speaker and then Gl / h to adjust the balance. The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn. • Press h to increase the value. • Press l to decrease the value. >CANCEL Choices: SET, CANCEL • Select “SET” to apply the settings you made. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure without making any changes. y You can also press P MENU to cancel the setup procedure. 8 Press G ENTER to confirm your selection. If you selected “SET” in step 7, each speaker outputs a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears in the front panel display for a few seconds and then “CHECK OK?” appears in the front panel display. FR ----||---• Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front left and right speakers. • Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front left and center speakers. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front left and surround left speakers. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the surround left and surround right speakers. • Select “SW” to adjust the balance between the front left speaker and the subwoofer. CHECK:TestTone y • Check the speaker connections (see page 5) and adjust the “SPEAKERS” settings back in step 6, if necessary. • The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone flashes in the front panel display. 9 Press Gl / h to select the desired setting. Note CHECK OK? .. YES Choices: YES, NO • Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if the test tone levels from each speaker were satisfactory. • Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level adjustment menu to balance the output level of each speaker. 22 En The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. 12 Press P MENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP”. SELECTING THE SCENE TEMPLATES Selecting the SCENE templates This unit is equipped with 13 preset SCENE templates for various situations of using this unit. As the initial factory setting, the following SCENE templates are assigned to each SCENE button: 2 Press D INPUT l / h (or press DAMP and then G l / h) to select the desired template. l SCENE 1: DVD Viewing SCENE 2: Disc Listening SCENE 3: TV Viewing SCENE 4: Radio Listening INPUT h Front panel or If you want to use other SCENE templates, you can select the desired SCENE templates from the SCENE template library and assign the templates to the selected SCENE buttons on the front panel and the remote control. AMP ENTER Select the desired SCENE template BASIC OPERATION Remote control 1 SCENE template library (Image) Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button Selecting the desired SCENE template 1 Press and hold the desired F SCENE (or E SCENE) button for 3 seconds. The indicator on the selected SCENE button on the front panel starts to flash, and the name of currently assigned SCENE template appears in the front panel display. 3 seconds 3 seconds 1 or 1 Front panel Remote control DVD MovieView 3 Press the F SCENE (or E SCENE) button again to confirm the selection. The selected SCENE template is assigned to the button. 1 Front panel or 1 Remote control Notes • If you do not carry out any operation within 30 seconds from the last operation in these steps, this procedure is automatically canceled. • Once the desired SCENE templates are assigned to the corresponding SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 51 for details. 1 Flashes English DVD Viewing 23 En Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Which SCENE template would you like to select? Which source do you like to play back? Video sources (DVD video, Recorded video) Which component do you like for playback? DVD SCENE templates DVD Viewing Default SCENE buttons 1 DVD Movie Viewing DVD Live Viewing Music discs (CD, SA-CD or DVD-Audio) DVR DVR Viewing DVD Music Disc Listening Disc Listening CD 2 CD Listening CD Music Listening Radio programs TUNER (FM/AM) XM* TV programs DTV/CBL Radio Listening 4 XM Listening TV Viewing 3 TV Sports Viewing Video games V-AUX Game Playing Note * To enjoy XM Satellite Radio programs, you need to connect the XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately) to this unit (see page 37). y You can create your original SCENE templates by editing the preset SCENE templates. See page 26 for details. 24 En Selecting the SCENE templates ■ Preset SCENE template descriptions SCENE template CD Music Listening Features Select this SCENE template when you play back music source as the back ground music on your CD player. Input source Playback mode CD 5ch Stereo DVD Viewing (SCENE 1 as the default setting) Select this SCENE template when you play back general contents on your DVD player. DVD STRAIGHT DVD Movie Viewing Radio Listening (SCENE 4 as the default setting) Select this SCENE template when you enjoy FM or AM radio programs. TUNER Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your DVD player. DVD MUSIC ENHANCER 5ch STEREO XM Listening Movie Dramatic Select this SCENE template when you enjoy XM Satellite Radio programs. DVD Live Viewing DVD Pop/Rock TV Viewing (SCENE 3 as the default setting) Select this SCENE template when you enjoy TV programs. DVR Viewing DTV/CBL Select this SCENE template when you play back movies on your digital video recorder. DVR Music Disc Listening STRAIGHT TV Sports Viewing Movie Dramatic Select this SCENE template when you enjoy sports programs on TV. DTV/CBL Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your DVD player. DVD MUSIC ENHANCER 5ch STEREO XM BASIC OPERATION Select this SCENE template when you enjoy music live video on your DVD player. TV Sports Game Playing 2ch Stereo Select this SCENE template when you play video games. Disc Listening (SCENE 2 as the default setting) V-AUX Game Select this SCENE template when you play back music sources as the back ground music on your DVD player. DVD 5ch Stereo CD Listening Select this SCENE template when you play back music discs on your CD player. CD 2ch Stereo English 25 En Selecting the SCENE templates Creating your original SCENE templates 2 You can create your original SCENE templates for each SCENE button. You can refer to the preset 13 SCENE templates to create the original SCENE templates. ■ Customizing the preset SCENE templates • The input source component • The active sound field programs or STRAIGHT mode • The night listening mode setting (see page 28) − SYSTEM: Keeps the current night listening mode. − CINEMA: Sets the night listening mode to the CINEMA mode. − MUSIC: Sets the night listening mode to the MUSIC mode. Use this feature to customize the preset SCENE templates. Select the desired SCENE template Create an original SCENE template SCENE template library (Image) Press G k / n to select the desired parameter of the SCENE template and then G l / h to select the desired value of the selected parameter. You can adjust the following parameters for a SCENE template: 3 Press the E SCENE button again to confirm the edit. 1 1 Assign the SCENE template to the SCENE button 1 Press and hold the desired E SCENE button for 3 seconds and then press D AMP. The SCENE template customizing screen appears on the front panel display. 1 AMP 3 seconds Note When the SCENE template you want to customize is not assigned to any of the E SCENE button, press G l / h repeatedly to recall the desired SCENE template (see page 23). 26 En y An asterisk mark (*) appears by the name of the original SCENE template. Notes • After changing the assignment of the SCENE template to the E SCENE buttons, you may need to set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control. See page 51 for details. • You can create a customized SCENE template for each E SCENE button, and if you create another customized SCENE template, this unit overwrites the old customized SCENE template with the new one. • The customized SCENE template is only available for the assigned E SCENE button. PLAYBACK Playback Caution Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. Basic operations 1 3 Rotate 8 VOLUME (or press Q VOLUME +/ –) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. 6 Press A PROGRAM l / h (or press D AMP and then press I PROG l / h) repeatedly to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. See page 31 for details about sound field programs. Movie Dramatic Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press 9 SPEAKERS repeatedly to select the front speakers you want to use. The respective speaker indicators lights up in the front panel display. Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (C)) to select the desired input source. The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display for a few seconds. Available input source DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM INPUT:DVD Currently selected surround field program Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 28). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 33). • To display information about the currently selected input source in the front panel display, see page 30 for details. BASIC OPERATION 2 5 ■ Guide to contents Currently selected input source When you want to... 4 Start playback on the selected component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 34 for details about FM/AM tuning instructions. • See page 37 for details about XM Satellite Radio tuning instructions. See page Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 29 Edit parameters of sound field programs 32 Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at night 28 Use headphones 28 Select a decoder to play back sources with 32 Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 30 English 27 En Playback ■ Selecting the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source Additional operations ■ Using your headphones Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. VOLUME FM/AM CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY y DISPLAY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SILENT CINEMA SPEAKERS A/B/OFF TONE CONTROL PROGRAM 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT h Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press A MULTI CH IN) so that “MULTI CH” appears in the front panel display. Use “MULTI CH SET” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the parameter for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 49). STANDBY /ON EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 17) as the input source. 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT Notes • Sound field programs mode cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. • When headphones are used, signals are output only from the front left and right channels. ■ Selecting the night listening mode y When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (see page 33). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. ■ Muting the audio output Press NMUTE to mute the audio output. Press NMUTE again to resume the audio output. y • You can also rotate 8 VOLUME (or press QVOLUME +/–) to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using “MUTE TYP.” in “SOUND MENU” (see page 48). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. 28 En The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. 1 Press DAMP and then press KNIGHT repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, NIGHT OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” to preserve ease-oflistening for all sounds. • Select “NIGHT OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. Playback 2 ■ Adjusting the tonal quality Press Gl / h to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front left and right speaker channels. Press 0 TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select “BASS” or “TREBLE” and then press A PROGRAM l / h to adjust the corresponding frequency response level. • Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response. • Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency response. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source. – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are assigned to an input source. y • We recommend setting audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default audio input jack select of this unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 50). ■ Adjusting speaker levels during playback You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. Note This operation will override the level adjustment made in “SP LEVEL” (see page 46). 1 Press E AUDIO SELECT (or B AUDIO SEL) repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack select setting. DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM Audio input jack select setting ANALOG Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SUR.L Surround left speaker SUR.R Surround right speaker SWFR Subwoofer y Once you press FLEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing G k / n. 2 Note This feature is not available when no digital input jack are assigned to the currently selected input source. Press DAMP and then press FLEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. Display A.SEL:AUTO AUTO BASIC OPERATION ■ Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) • Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers. Press G l / h on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. The control range is from –10 dB to +10 dB. y 29 En English You can press 4 A/B/C/D/E to select a speaker and then 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to adjust the speaker output level. Playback ■ Displaying the signal information ■ Using the sleep timer You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. 1 Press DAMP and then press OSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press O SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. Press DAMP and then press PMENU on the remote control. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. ;BASIC SETUP 2 3 Press Gk / n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press GENTER. Press Gk / n to switch the displayed information. The following information about the input source appears in the front panel display. Display 4 Description FORMAT Signal format. SAMPL. The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. CH The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). B.RATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Press P MENU to exit. SLEEP 120min SLEEP OFF SLEEP 90min SLEEP 30min SLEEP 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. y • To cancel the sleep timer, press O SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. • You can also cancel the sleep timer setting by pressing 1 STANDBY/ON (or M STANDBY) to set this unit to the standby mode. ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. MULTI CH IN CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX XM Audio sources Video sources 30 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. Press A PROGRAM l / h (or press D AMP and then press IPROG l / h repeatedly). The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display. Notes • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 28). • When PCM signals with a sampling frequency higher than 48 kHz are input, this unit is automatically set to the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 33). y • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. • You can select “Music Enh. 2ch” and “Music Enh. 5ch” by pressing T ENHANCER on the remote control repeatedly. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. Category MUSIC Program Features Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program presents an image of pop, rock, or jazz live concert. The sound field reproduces the spaciousness of a massive pavilion with an emphasis on the vividness of vocals on the stage and solo instruments and the beats of rhythm instruments. Hall HiFi DSP processing. This sound field is suitable for classic and orchestral music. The program uses data collected in a large concert hall in Munich. You can enjoy delicate and beautiful reverberation and a majestic atmosphere. Jazz HiFi DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for jazz and fusion music. BASIC OPERATION Sound field program descriptions It uses data collected in a famous jazz club in New York. You can enjoy clear reverberation. ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO ENHANCER Game CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy dynamic and thrilling sound effects as you play games. The program lets you feel the depth and three-dimensional surrounding sounds of the field where you are playing, and offers cinema-like surrounding sound effects for the scenes of movies. TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. You can enjoy sports relays broadcast in stereo and variety shows with a live sound environment. For sports relays, the voices of commentators and announcers come clearly from the center; the cheers and atmosphere in the stadium spread around within a comfortable range, and you can feel like as if you are in the stadium. Movie Spacious CINEMA DSP processing. The sound field is suitable for movies with an emphasis on spectacular sound effects, and is a perfect fit with a wide screen. The program reproduces a wide dynamic range from minimum sound effects to powerful sounds. Movie Dramatic CINEMA DSP processing. This sound field is also suitable for movies with an emphasis on threedimensional sound effects. It restrains reverberation to an moderate extent, but reproduces sound effects and background music in a soft, three-dimensional manner with clarity and center orientation of voices as pivots. 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 5ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Music Enh. 2ch Music Enh. 5ch Select these programs to play back compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) in 2-channel or 5-channel stereo. This program enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. Note 31 En English The sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. Sound field programs ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) y Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. For Pop/Rock, Hall, Jazz, Game, TV Sports, Movie Spacious and Movie Dramatic: Press D AMP and then press J SUR. DECODE repeatedly to select a decoder. You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. STANDARD Functions PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources Neural Neural Surround processing for any sources ■ Editing sound fields parameters You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. 1 2 While listening to a source, press D AMP and then press Gk / n to select the desired parameter. Press Gl / h to change the parameter value. Note You cannot change parameter values when “MEM. GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 50). 32 En Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. DSP level DSP LEVEL Function: Adjusts the effect level. Choices: MIN, MID, MAX For PRO LOGIC II Music: Panorama PANORAMA Function: Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: OFF, ON Dimension DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). Center width CT WIDTH Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For Music Enh. 2ch and Music Enh. 5ch Effect level Function: Choices: Adjusts the effect level. LOW, HIGH Sound field programs ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers by creating virtual speakers. If you set “SUR. LR” to “NONE” (see page 45), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP program (see page 31). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. LR” is set to “NONE” (see page 45) in the following cases: – when “5ch Stereo” (see page 31) is selected. – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 31). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Note SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 28). ■ Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) BASIC OPERATION When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 2channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Press B STRAIGHT (or press D AMP and then S STRAIGHT) to select “STRAIGHT”. To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press B STRAIGHT (or S STRAIGHT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. English 33 En FM/AM TUNING FM/AM tuning There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations. Automatic tuning Manual tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. Lights up If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Note Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 1 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. 2 Press 3 FM/AM to select the reception band (FM or AM). 3 Press 7 TUNING AUTO/MAN’L so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. AUTO A AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) A If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, automatic tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/ TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. Lights up AUTO TUNED A 34 En AM 1530 kHz AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, manual tuning is not possible. Press 2 PRESET/ TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune into the desired station manually. You can hold down the button to continue searching. FM/AM tuning Automatic preset tuning Manual preset tuning You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. 1 2 3 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly so that “TUNER” is displayed in the front panel display. Press 3 FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. Tune into a station automatically or manually. See page 34 for tuning instructions. 2 Press 6 MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. 3 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E and 5 PRESET/ TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly to select a preset station group (A1 to E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Press and hold 6 MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. Flashes TUNED C3 : AM Flash AUTO A1:FM 87.50MHz When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 630 kHz Preset station number MEMORY Flashes MEMORY BASIC OPERATION 1 4 Press 6 MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. y You can select the preset station group and the preset station number where the first received station will be stored by pressing 4 A/B/C/D/E and then 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on this page. TUNED C3 : AM 630 kHz The displayed station has been stored as C3. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. English 35 En FM/AM tuning Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. y When performing this operation with the remote control, press C TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press 4 A/B/C/D/E (or G A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 1 Select preset station “E1” using 4 A/B/C/D/E and 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. 2 Press and hold 2 PRESET/TUNING for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes 2 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or G PRESET/CH k / n) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. MEMORY E1 : FM 87.50MHz Flashes 3 E1 : FM 87.50MHz y Select preset station “A5” using 4 A/B/C/D/ E and 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on this page. You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control. Flashes MEMORY A5 : FM 90.60MHz Flashes 4 36 En Press 2 PRESET/TUNING again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio tuning XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much more. Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with XM Mini-Tuner Dock. XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock (sold separately) For U.S. customers, information about XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmradio.com. For Canadian customers, information about XM Canada is online at www.xmradio.ca. BASIC OPERATION This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. XM DVD Note The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada. ■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc. Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. PR y • To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Mini-Tuner Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. • Use the “XM ANT.” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 50) to display the XM Satellite Radio reception level in the front panel display. For the best reception, orient the connected XM Mini-Tuner so that a value of 60% or more is displayed. Note If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, the XM Mini-Tuner Dock may not be connected to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. See “Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock” on this page and check the connection. English 37 En XM Satellite Radio tuning Activating XM Satellite Radio Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Dock to your XM Ready® home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference. Basic XM Satellite Radio operations 1 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press C XM) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. Lights up DVR Note The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-9672346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done. For more information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at www.xmradio.ca or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677). V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM [001] Preview y When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. 2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on page 39. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on page 39. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” on page 39. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 39. y • You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 32). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 40). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display (see page 41). 38 En XM Satellite Radio tuning y When performing these operations with the remote control, press C XM to select “XM” as the input source. 3 ■ All Channel Search mode 1 2 Press 2 SEARCH MODE (or P SRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or G PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. y y You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control. ■ Direct Number Access mode 1 Press P SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press the numeric buttons (V) to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons as shown below. • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or G PRESET/CH k / n). • To display the XM Radio ID number displayed in the front panel display, select channel “0”. Press 2 SEARCH MODE (or P SRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press 4 CATEGORY (or G A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the channel category. 3 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or G PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. l h ENHANCER 1 2 3 BASIC OPERATION ■ Category Search mode 1 Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or G PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). The display changes as follows. <XM> --1 <XM> -12 y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or G PRESET/CH k / n). ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 40. y All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001 Preview” by the initial factory setting. Press 2 SEARCH MODE (or P SRCH MODE) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. 2 Press 4 CATEGORY (or G A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). y • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the numeric buttons (V) and then press W ENT. to confirm the input number. Instead of pressing W ENT. to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons (V) or W ENT. cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure. English 1 <XM>123 39 En XM Satellite Radio tuning Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels 4 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 39. Press 5 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or G PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel number appears in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY 1 2 Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 38 for details. Press 6 MEMORY (or H XM MEMORY). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. Note C5 [043] XMU Currently selected preset channel number 5 Press 6 MEMORY (or H XM MEMORY) to set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a preset channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel display. 3 Press 4 CATEGORY (or G A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly to select a preset channel group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel group letter appears in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY C [043] XMU Currently selected preset channel group 40 En C5:[043] XMU Colon (:) Note Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in the same preset channel group and number is cleared. XM Satellite Radio tuning Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display. Note If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 59 for appropriate remedies. ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display BASIC OPERATION Press 7 DISPLAY (or R DISPLAY) repeatedly to toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. Channel number/name Channel category Artist name/song title y • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 50). • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. English 41 En RECORDING Recording Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. Notes • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 29) and VOLUME settings, speaker levels (see page 29) and the sound field programs (see page 31) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital signals, you cannot record the source. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep the component turned on while using this unit. If the component is turned off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Press D INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons (C)) to select the source component you want to record from. 42 En 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. Set menu Set menu You can use the following parameters in set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 21). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, the crossover frequency, and the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. 45 B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 46 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the distance of each speaker. 47 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 47 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 47 F)D. RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 47 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay settings, maximum volume level and initial volume level. 48 ADVANCED OPERATION Features Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)INPUT ASSIGN Assigns the input jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 48 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 49 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 49 D)DECODER MODE Selects the decoder mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 49 E)MULTI CH SET Select the video source played in the background of the sources in put from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 49 English 43 En Set menu Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display and the way in which the XM information is displayed. 50 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other set menu settings. 50 C)AUDIO SELECT Designates the default audio input jack select setting mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. 50 D)PARAM. INI Sets all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. 50 E)XM RADIO SET Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals. 50 Note The “XM RADIO SET” parameter is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models. ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 30). Using set menu 4 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. y You can change the set menu parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. 1 1 SOUND MENU Press D AMP and then press P MENU on the remote control. “BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display. 2 INPUT MENU . BASIC SETUP 2 Press G k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”. 3 OPTION MENU 5 Press G k / n repeatedly and then press G ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. • Repeat steps 5 and 6 to navigate to and enter the items you want to adjust. • To return to the previous menu level, press H RETURN. 6 Press G k / n to select the desired parameter and then G l / h to change the parameter value. • Press G h to increase the value. • Press G l to decrease the value. 7 Press P MENU to exit from set menu. . MANUAL SETUP 3 Press G ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. “1 SOUND MENU” appears in the front panel display. 1 SOUND MENU 44 En Press G k / n repeatedly and then press G ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following menus appear in the front panel display as you press G k / n repeatedly. Set menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. FRONT B speaker setting FRONT B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select “FRONT” to turn FRONT A and B on and off when the FRONT B speakers are set in the main zone. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the FRONT B terminals are set in another zone. If FRONT A is turned off and FRONT B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at the FRONT B terminals only. Notes Front speakers FRONT Choices: SMALL, LARGE When the front speakers are large Select “LARGE” (large). When the front speakers are small Select “SMALL” (small). Note When “BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 46), you can select only “LARGE” in “FRONT”. If the value of “FRONT” is set to a setting other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit automatically changes the value to “LARGE”. Center speaker CENTER Choices: NONE, SML, LRG When the center speaker is large Select “LRG” (large). When the center speaker is small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the center speaker Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. Surround left/right speakers SUR. LR Choices: NONE, SML, LRG ADVANCED OPERATION • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the FRONT B terminals when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “FRONT B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 33). Woofer section of a speaker is 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large Woofer section of a speaker is smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small When the surround speakers are large Select “LRG” (large). When the surround speakers are small Select “SML” (small). When you do not use the surround speakers Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 33). English 45 En Set menu LFE/Bass out BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get natural bass sound Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. When a subwoofer is connected to this unit and you want to get rich bass sound Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT” setting (see page 45). When you do not use a subwoofer Select “FRNT” (front). The LFE signals, the lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT” setting (see page 45). Crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 44 and 45). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 44 and 45). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NRM, REV • Select “NRM” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REV” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. 46 En ■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust the output level of each speaker. Control range: –10 to +10 dB Control step: 1 dB Initial setting: 0 dB SP LEVEL Adjusted speaker FL Front left speaker FR Front right speaker C Center speaker SL Surround left speaker SR Surround right speaker SWFR Subwoofer Note The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Set menu ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) SP DISTANCE Adjusted speaker Front left speaker FRONT R Front right speaker CENTER Center speaker SUR. L Surround left speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SWFR Subwoofer Following is an example where “100Hz” is selected as the frequency band. 100Hz--||-- 0 Test tone TEST Use this feature to make adjustments for “CENTER GEQ” while listening to a test tone. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the center and front left speakers. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB ADVANCED OPERATION FRONT L y Press G k / n to select a frequency band and G l / h to adjust the selected frequency band. Speaker LFE SP LFE Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone LFE HP LFE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Note The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Depending on the settings of “BASS OUT” (see page 46), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. ■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ ■ Dynamic range F)D. RANGE Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments while listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0 dB Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. Speaker dynamic range SP D.R Adjusts the speaker compression. English Headphone dynamic range HP D.R Adjusts the headphone compression. 47 En Set menu ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. Mute type MUTE TYP. Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 28). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay A.DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Maximum volume MAX VOL. Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is 16 dB to –80 dB. However, when “MAX VOL.” is set to –5 dB, the volume range becomes –5 dB to –80 dB. Control range: 16 dB, 10 dB to –30 dB Control step: 5 dB Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume” setting. For example, if “INI VOL.” is set to –20 dB and “MAX VOL.” is set to –30 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Initial volume INI VOL. Use this feature to set the volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16 dB Control step: 1 dB Note The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INI VOL.” setting. 48 En 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. ■ Input assignment A)INPUT ASSIGN Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using D INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons (C) on the remote control). For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 1 IN (1) Choices: (1) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 and 3 IN (2) IN (3) Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR Note You cannot select a specific item more than once. Set menu ■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the front panel display. The following is an example where “DVD” is renamed “My DVD”. DVR DVD 1 V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM My DVD Press one of the input selector buttons (C) or A MULTI CH IN to select the input source you want to change the name of. MULTI CH IN 2 MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX XM Press D AMP and then press G l / h on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. Press G k / n to select the character you want to use and then press G l / h to move to the next space. ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE Decoder select mode Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used the connected input source. DTS decoder prioritize setting Choices: AUTO, DTS • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” when you play back a DTS-CD. ■ Multi channel input setup E)MULTI CH SET Notes • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press G n to change the character in the following order, or press G k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) ADVANCED OPERATION 3 CD ■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR, MULTI CH IN, XM RADIO Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB BGV BGV Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Choices: LAST, DVR, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, DVD y 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press P MENU to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. English 49 En Set menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press G l to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press G h to make the front panel display brighter. Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as song title or channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “XM” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Memory guard MEM. GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEM. GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – sound field program parameters – all set menu items – all speaker levels – SCENE template parameters Note When “MEM. GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other set menu items. 50 En ■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack select setting for the input sources when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select “AUTO” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “LAST” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected input source (see page 29). ■ Parameter initialization D)PARAM. INI Use this feature to set all the parameters of the sound field programs to the initial factory settings. Choices: NO, YES • Select “NO” to cancel the parameter initialization and return to the previous menu level. • Select “YES” to set all the sound field parameters to the initial factory settings. Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize the sound field program parameters. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEM. GUARD” is set to “ON”. ■ XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET (U.S.A. and Canada models only) XM Radio antenna XM ANT. Use this feature to check the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals (see page 37). For the best reception, orient XM Mini-Tuner Dock so that a value of 60% or more is displayed here. Display status: NONE, 0 to 100% Note “NONE” is displayed if XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 37). Remote control features Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 54). Using remote control on the SCENE feature ■ Controlling the input source components in the SCENE mode ■ Setting input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control You can operate both this unit and the input source component by using the remote control. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 54). If you customize the input source of the selected SCENE template, you must set the input source of the SCENE template on the remote control to operate the input source component correctly. 1 Press the desired E SCENE button on the remote control. 2 Press the desired buttons in the * area below to control the input source component of the selected SCENE template. Press and hold the E SCENE button and the desired input selector button (C) for 3 seconds. y POWER STANDBY POWER AV AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVR TV CH TV MUTE TV VOL DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX XM AMP TV INPUT 1 2 SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 4 ADVANCED OPERATION * POWER TV MULTI CH IN Press the E SCENE button again to operate the input source component. SCENE buttons SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU ENTER RETURN XM MEMORY DISPLAY REC l PROG h 1 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT. Note * These buttons control the input source component. See page 53 for details of the function of each button. English 51 En Remote control features Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Press D AMP to control this unit. Press C DTV/CBL to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL (see page 54). POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR TV CH TV MUTE TV VOL POWER V-AUX XM AMP TV INPUT 1 2 *1 DTV/CBL AMP POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVR TV CH TV MUTE TV VOL DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX XM AMP TV INPUT 1 2 *1 SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 4 SCENE SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 4 SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU ENTER ENTER RETURN XM MEMORY *2 DISPLAY REC RETURN XM MEMORY l PROG h 1 2 *2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 DISPLAY REC SUR.DECODE NIGHT l 1 ENT. PROG h 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT. Notes *1 *2 These buttons always control this unit. These buttons control this unit only when D AMP is pressed. Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of whether you press C DTV/CBL or not. Remote control *2 52 En Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV INPUT Changes the input source. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. These buttons control your TV only when C DTV/CBL is pressed. For details, see the “Digital TV/Cable TV” column on page 53. Remote control features ■ Controlling other components Press one of the input selector buttons (C) or to control other components. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 54). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. 1 POWER POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DTV/CBL DVR V-AUX XM AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE TV CH 1 2 3 2 BAND LEVEL TITLE 3 4 5 SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU 7 ENTER RETURN XM MEMORY 8 DISPLAY REC TV VOL SCENE The remote control has 9 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 9 different components. 4 6 l PROG h 1 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT. 9 DVD player/ VCR recorder Digital TV/ Cable TV LD player CD player MD/CD recorder AV POWER Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TITLE Title PRESET/CH k Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8) PRESET/CH n Down VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8) A-E/CAT. l Left Left Preset down (A-E) A-E/CAT. h Right Right Preset up (A-E) Remote control Power *1 Tuner Band ENTER Enter Enter RETURN Return Return REC Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec Rec *2 p Play Play Play *2 w Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward *2 f Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause Skip backward *2 Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Play Disc skip Rec Play Play b Skip backward Skip backward a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop 6 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons 7 8 9 MENU Menu DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display ENT. Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ADVANCED OPERATION 4 5 POWER DVD y 1 2 3 STANDBY Preset stations (1-8) Menu Notes *1 *2 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 54). English 53 En Remote control features Setting remote control codes 1 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. While pressing and holding one of the input selector buttons (C) on the remote control to select the input area you want to set up, press AV POWER for more than 3 seconds. CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR Remote control code default settings Input source Component category Manufacturer CD CD YAMAHA 5013 MD/CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 5001 TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 5007 DVD DVD YAMAHA 2000 DTV/CBL – – – V-AUX TUNER YAMAHA 5011 XM TUNER YAMAHA 5009 DVR DVR YAMAHA 2011 TUNER YAMAHA 5012 Note You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code. 54 En POWER AV Default code V-AUX XM While holding down 2 Press for 3 seconds Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) (V) to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component to be used. Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 2, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. Advanced setup Advanced setup This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • Only 1 STANDBY/ON, A PROGRAM l / h and B STRAIGHT are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • No other operations can be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN • Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level Front (A or B) 8Ω MIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround Front (A or B) 1 Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press and hold 0 TONE CONTROL and then press 1 STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press A PROGRAM l / h to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. 6Ω MIN Center The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround Notes 4 Press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the set menu parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. 5 Press 1 STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. ■ Tuner frequency step TU (Asia and General models only) y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Factory presets PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. English 55 En Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound 56 En Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 13 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 12 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14-17 No appropriate Audio input jack select has been set. Set an appropriate Audio input jack select. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with D INPUT l / h on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 12 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with 9 SPEAKERS. 27 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press N MUTE or Q VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 28 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — 29 27, 28 Troubleshooting Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Cause The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy See page Check that the impedance setting is correct. 13 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press N MUTE or Q VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 28 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14-17 Incorrect settings in “SP LEVEL”. Adjust the “SP LEVEL” settings. 29 When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER” to “SML” or “LRG”. 45 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 5ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 31 “SUR. LR” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. LR” to “SML” or “LRG”. 45 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press B STRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 33 “BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 46 “BASS OUT” in “SPEAKER SET” is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel source is being played. Set “BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 46 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. No sound is heard from the subwoofer. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. The source does not contain lowfrequency bass signals. English 57 En Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy See page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 29 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. You are attempting to set the volume level higher than the maximum volume level. Adjust “MAX VOL.” setting. 48 The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEM. GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEM. GUARD” to “OFF”. 50 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature is too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — 58 En 15, 17 Troubleshooting ■ Tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM ■ Remedy The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. See page Check the antenna connections. 18 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 34 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 34 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations. 35 The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 34 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Status message Cause Remedy See page The XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock are not connected to the XM jack of this unit or do not work properly. Check XM Mini-Tuner and XM Dock connections and orient for the best reception level. 37 UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. — NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the XM Mini-Tuner for the best reception level. 37 LOADING It takes longer than four seconds for audio or text data to be decoded. Wait until the decoding process has finished. — OFF AIR The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is not currently broadcasting any signals. Check the channel number again or select another XM Satellite Radio channel. — <XM> - - - The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer available. - - - No artist name or song title is available. Select another channel category by pressing 4 CATEGORY (or G A-E/CAT. l / h) repeatedly. 39 / - - - <CAT> - - - No channels are available for the selected category. 59 En English CHECK ANTENNA ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 20 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 54 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 54 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ■ Resetting the system Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. 1 Press 1 STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press and hold 0 TONE CONTROL and then press 1 STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. The advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 3 Press A PROGRAM l / h to select “PRESET”. 4 Press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “RESET”. Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. 5 Press 1 STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. 60 En Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the set menu parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press B STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “CANCEL” and then press 1 STANDBY/ON. Glossary Glossary ■ Audio information Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1-channel systems. Neural Surround Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 5.1-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). English 61 En Glossary Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ Sound field program information CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP uses Yamaha original DSP technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field program so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. 62 En ■ Video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. Specifications Specifications AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω .................................................... 100 W [Other models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω .................................................... 100 W VIDEO SECTION • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component ......................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y) • Video Maximum Input Level ................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more • Maximum Power (JEITA) [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 135 W [Asia, China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ......................................................135 W • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more • MAX Power Per Channel [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................... 105 W or more • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models]..........87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • IEC Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.1% THD, 8 Ω ........................................ 90 W or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component Signal .................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono ................................................................. 2.8 µV (20.2 dBf) • Dynamic Power [U.S.A. and Canada models] (Impedance Selector: 8 Ω) (IHF, 8/6/4/2 Ω) .......................................... 110/130/175/185 W [Other models] (IHF, 6/4/2 Ω) .................................................... 105/135/165 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 73 dB/70 dB • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω .................................................................................... 0.41 dB AM SECTION • Frequency Response CD, etc. to Front L/R ......................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, 0/–3 dB V-AUX to Front L/R ............................ 10 Hz to 20 kHz, 0/–3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. (2ch stereo) to Front SP OUT, 50 W/8 Ω .............................................................. 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. (STEREO) Input shorted (250 mV) ........ 100 dB or more • Channel Separation CD, etc. Input 5.1 kΩ shorted (1 kHz/10 kHz) ................................................................... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance 1 kHz, 50 mV/8 Ω .................................................. 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Signal CD, etc. 1 kHz, 0.5%THD (EFFECT ON) ............. 2.0 V or more • Output Level/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT (REC) ............................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER OUTPUT (2ch Stereo and FRONT SP: SMALL) ..................... 4 V/1.2 kΩ • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz [Australia model] .............................................. 240 V AC, 50 Hz [Korea model] ................................................... 220 V AC, 60 Hz [China model] .................................................... 220 V AC, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] .................................. 230 V AC, 50 Hz [Asia and General models] .............................................. 110-120/220–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 240 W/320 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 240 W • Standby Power Consumption [Except Asia and General models] ...................................... 0.8 W ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.5%/0.5% • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] 5ch, 10%/THD ................................................................ 530 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 151 x 318 mm (17-1/8” x 5-15/16” x 12-1/2”) • Weight ............................................................. 8.0 kg (17 lbs 10 oz) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) ................................... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct. English 63 En INDEX Index ■ Numerics 1 SOUND MENU ................................ 43 2 INPUT MENU ............................ 43, 48 2ch Stereo ............................................ 31 3 OPTION MENU ......................... 44, 50 5ch Stereo ............................................ 31 ■ A A)DISPLAY SET ................................ 50 A)INPUT ASSIGN .............................. 48 A)SPEAKER SET ............................... 45 A.DELAY ............................................ 48 Activating XM Satellite Radio ............ 38 Adjusting speaker levels during playback ............................... 29 Adjusting the tonal quality ................... 29 All Channel Search mode .................... 39 AM tuning ............................................ 34 ANTENNA terminals .......................... 10 Audio cable plugs ................................ 14 Audio delay .......................................... 48 AUDIO jacks ................................. 10, 14 Audio jacks .......................................... 14 AUDIO SELECT ........................... 29, 50 Audio select ......................................... 50 Audio settings ...................................... 48 Automatic preset tuning ....................... 35 Automatic tuning ................................. 34 ■ B B)INPUT RENAME ............................ 49 B)MEMORY GUARD ........................ 50 B)SP LEVEL ....................................... 46 BASIC SETUP .............................. 21, 43 Basic setup ........................................... 43 BASS OUT .......................................... 46 ■ C C)SP DISTANCE ................................ 47 C)VOLUME TRIM ............................. 49 Category Search mode ......................... 39 CD Music Listening ............................. 25 CD Listening ........................................ 25 CENTER .............................................. 45 Center graphic equalizer ...................... 47 Center speaker ...................................... 45 Center width ......................................... 32 CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 19 COAXIAL INPUT assignment ............ 48 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ........ 10, 14 Connecting a cable TV/satellite tuner .. 15 Connecting a CD player ....................... 17 Connecting a DVD player .................... 15 Connecting a DVD recorder ................ 15 Connecting a video monitor ................. 15 Connecting audio components ............. 17 Connecting speakers ............................ 12 Connecting the AM antennas ............... 18 Connecting the FM antennas ............... 18 Connecting the power cable ................. 18 64 En Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner Dock ......................37 Connecting to the CENTER terminals ..........................13 Connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ..........16 Connecting to the FRONT A terminals .........................13 Connecting to the FRONT B terminals .........................13 Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks ................17 Connecting to the SURROUND terminals ....................13 Connecting to the VIDEO AUX ..........16 Connecting video components .............15 Controlling a TV ..................................52 Controlling other components ..............53 Creating original SCENE templates ....26 CROSSOVER ......................................46 Crossover .............................................46 CT WIDTH ..........................................32 ■ D D)CENTER GEQ .................................47 D)DECODER MODE ..........................49 D)PARAM. INI ....................................50 Decoder mode ......................................49 Decoder select mode ............................49 DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks ...14 DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks ....14 DIGITAL INPUT jacks .......................10 DIMENSION .......................................32 Dimension ............................................32 DIMMER .............................................50 Dimmer ................................................50 Direct Number Access mode ...............39 Disc Listening ......................................25 Display settings ....................................50 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information .......................................41 DSP LEVEL .........................................32 DSP level ..............................................32 DTS decoder indicator .........................19 DTS decoder prioritize setting .............49 DVD Live Viewing ..............................25 DVD Movie Viewing ...........................25 DVD Viewing ......................................25 DVR Viewing ......................................25 Dynamic range .....................................47 ■ E E)LFE LEVEL .....................................47 E)MULTI CH SET ...............................49 Editing sound fields parameters ...........32 ENHANCER indicator .........................19 Enjoying 2-channel sources using the standard decoders .............................32 Exchanging preset stations ...................36 ■ F F)D. RANGE ....................................... 47 Factory presets ..................................... 55 FL SCROLL ........................................ 50 FM tuning ............................................ 34 FRONT ................................................ 45 FRONT B ............................................ 45 FRONT B speaker setting ................... 45 Front panel display .............................. 19 Front panel display scroll .................... 50 Front speakers ...................................... 45 ■ G G)AUDIO SET .................................... 48 Game ................................................... 31 Game Playing ...................................... 25 ■ H Hall ...................................................... 31 Headphone ........................................... 47 Headphone dynamic range .................. 47 Headphones indicator .......................... 19 HiFi DSP indicator .............................. 19 HP D.R ................................................ 47 HP LFE ................................................ 47 ■ I Infrared window .................................. 20 INI VOL. ............................................. 48 Initial volume ...................................... 48 Input assignment .................................. 48 Input channel and speaker indicators .. 19 Input channel indicators ...................... 19 Input menu ........................................... 43 Input rename ........................................ 49 Input source indicators ........................ 19 Input source information ..................... 30 Installing batteries in the remote control ......................... 3 ■ J Jazz ...................................................... 31 ■ L LFE indicator ....................................... 19 LFE/Bass out ....................................... 46 Listening to unprocessed input signals .................................... 33 Low-frequency effect level ................. 47 ■ M Manual preset tuning ........................... 35 MANUAL SETUP .............................. 43 Manual setup ....................................... 43 Manual tuning ...................................... 34 MAX VOL. ......................................... 48 Maximum volume ............................... 48 MEM. GUARD ................................... 50 Memory guard ..................................... 50 Movie Dramatic ................................... 31 Movie Spacious ................................... 31 Index MULTI CH INPUT jacks .................... 10 Multi channel input setup .................... 49 Multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones .............. 33 Multi-information display .................... 19 Music Disc Listening ........................... 25 Music Enh. 2ch .................................... 31 Music Enh. 5ch .................................... 31 MUTE indicator ................................... 19 MUTE TYP. ......................................... 48 Muting type .......................................... 48 ■ N NIGHT indicator .................................. 19 Night listening mode ............................ 28 ■ O OPTICAL INPUT assignment ............. 48 Option menu ........................................ 44 SP LFE .................................................47 Speaker .................................................47 Speaker distance ...................................47 Speaker distances .................................47 Speaker dynamic range ........................47 Speaker impedance ...............................55 Speaker level ........................................46 Speaker settings ....................................45 SPEAKERS terminals ..........................10 Specifications .......................................63 Straight mode .......................................33 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack .............10 Subwoofer phase ..................................46 Supplied accessories ...............................3 SUR. LR ...............................................45 Surround left/right speakers .................45 SWFR PHASE .....................................46 ■ T Parameter initialization ........................ 50 PCM indicator ...................................... 19 Placing speakers ................................... 11 Playing video sources in the background ............................ 30 Pop/Rock .............................................. 31 PRESET ............................................... 55 Preset SCENE templates ...................... 25 Preset Search mode .............................. 39 TEST ....................................................47 Test tone ...............................................47 Troubleshooting ...................................56 TU ........................................................55 Tuner frequency step ............................55 Tuner indicators ...................................19 Turning off the power ..........................18 Turning on the power ...........................18 TV Sports .............................................31 TV Sports Viewing ..............................25 TV Viewing ..........................................25 ■ ■ ■ P R U Radio Listening .................................... 25 Rear panel ............................................ 10 Remote control codes ............................iii Resetting the system ............................ 60 UNIT ....................................................47 Unit .......................................................47 Using the remote control ......................20 Using your headphones ........................28 ■ ■ S V Video cable plugs .................................14 VIDEO jacks ..................................10, 14 Video jacks ...........................................14 VIRTUAL indicator .............................19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR ........................3 VOLUME level indicator .....................19 Volume Trim ........................................49 ■ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION X XM jack ................................................10 XM Listening .......................................25 XM Satellite Radio tuning ...................37 English SCENE 1 ................................................ 8 SCENE 2 ................................................ 8 SCENE 3 ................................................ 8 SCENE 4 ................................................ 8 Selecting audio input jacks .................. 29 Selecting preset stations ....................... 36 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component as the input source ......... 28 Selecting the night listening mode ....... 28 Selecting the SCENE templates ........... 23 Set menu .............................................. 43 Set this unit to the standby mode ......... 18 Setting input source of the customized SCENE template on the remote control ....................... 51 Setting remote control codes ................ 54 Setting the speaker impedance ............. 13 Setting XM Satellite Radio preset ....... 40 SILENT CINEMA ............................... 33 SILENT CINEMA indicator ................ 19 SLEEP indicator .................................. 19 Sleep timer ........................................... 30 Sound field programs ........................... 31 Sound menu ......................................... 43 SP A B indicators ................................. 19 SP D.R ................................................. 47 SP IMP. ................................................ 55 65 En ■ Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VOLUME STANDBY /ON EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY DISPLAY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM TONE CONTROL 3 4 l STRAIGHT INPUT NIGHT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 9 i 2 h 0 A B C D E F VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE ■ Remote control X A B C POWER POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR TV CH V-AUX XM AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE TV VOL 1 2 L M N O D E F SCENE BAND LEVEL TITLE G H 3 4 SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU Q ENTER RETURN XM MEMORY P R DISPLAY REC I J K l PROG h 1 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 8 ENT. S T U V W APPENDIX ii List of remote control codes TV ACER ACME ACURA ADA ADC ADMIRAL ADYSON AGASHI AGAZI AGB AIKO AIWA AKAI AKIBA AKURA ALARON ALBA ALBIRAL ALLSTAR AMPLIVISION 0093 0207 0208 0255 0206 0058, 0205, 0206, 0210, 0211 0200, 0207 0200 0206 0204 0127, 0200, 0207, 0208 0028, 0139, 0229, 0237 0059, 0065, 0127, 0129, 0130, 0200, 0204, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218, 0255 0209, 0218 0206, 0209, 0218 0200 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0217, 0218 0212 0213 0207 0204, 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218 AMTRON 0062 ANAM 0208 ANAM NATIONAL 0062 ANGLO 0208 ANITECH 0206, 0208 ANSONIC 0203, 0208 AOC 0060, 0061 APEX 0118, 0122, 0132 ARC EN CIEL 0216 ARCAM 0200 ARCAM DELTA 0207 ARISTONA 0213, 0217 ASA 0205, 0211 ASBERG 0213 ASTRA 0208 ASUKA 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 ATLANTIC 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 ATORI 0208 AUDIOSONIC 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0218 AUDIOTON 0207 AUDIOVOX 0062 AUTOVOX 0205, 0206, 0207 AWA 0200 BAIRD 0216 BANG & OLUFSEN 0205 BASIC LINE 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 BASTIDE 0207 BAUR 0217 BEKO 0228 BELCOR 0060 AMSTRAD iii BELL & HOWELL 0058, 0064 BENQ 0051, 0081 BEON 0213, 0217 BESTAR 0213 BINATONE 0207 BLACK STAR 0214 BLAUPUNKT 0255 BLUE SKY 0209, 0218 BONDSTEC 0214 BOOTS 0207 BRADFORD 0062 BRANDT 0216, 0226 BRIONVEGA 0205, 0213, 0217 BRITANNIA 0200, 0207 BROCKWOOD 0060 BROKSONIC 0138 BRUNS 0205 BSR 0215 BTC 0209, 0218 BUSH 0177, 0208, 0209, 0210, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218, 0230, 0237 CANDLE 0060, 0061 CAPSONIC 0206 CASCADE 0208 CATHAY 0213, 0217 CCE 0127 CELEBRITY 0059 CENTURION 0213, 0217 CENTURY 0205 CGE 0214, 0215 CIMLINE 0208, 0218 CITIZEN 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 CITY 0208 CLARIVOX 0212, 0217 CLATRONIC 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0214, 0218 CMS 0200 COLORTYME 0060, 0061 CONCERTO 0060, 0061 CONCORDE 0208 CONDOR 0200, 0207, 0213 CONTEC 0200, 0207, 0208 CONTEC/CONY 0062 CONTINENTAL EDISON 0216 COSMEL 0208 CRAIG 0062 CROSLEY 0205, 0214, 0215 CROWN 0062, 0063, 0128, 0208, 0213, 0217 CS ELECTRONICS 0200, 0207, 0209, 0214, 0218 CTC 0214 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064, 0065 CXC 0062 CYBERTRON 0209, 0218 DAEWOO 0060, 0061, 0120, 0127, 0155, 0193, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0218, 0238 DAINICHI DANSAI DANTAX DAYTRON DE GRAAF DECCA DESMET DIAMOND DIMENSIA DIXI DTS DUAL DUAL-TEC DUMONT 0200, 0209, 0218 0200, 0206, 0213, 0217 0217 0060, 0061, 0208 0210 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217 0213, 0217 0200 0057 0208, 0213, 0217 0208 0207, 0215, 0216 0207, 0208, 0215 0060, 0127, 0205, 0207 DURABRAND 0126 0217 0213, 0217 0203, 0204, 0212, 0218 ELBE-SHARP 0204 ELCIT 0204, 0205 ELECTRO TECH 0208 ELECTROBAND 0059 ELECTROHOME 0059, 0060, 0061 ELIN 0200, 0207, 0213, 0217 ELITE 0209, 0213, 0218 ELMAN 0215 ELTA 0200, 0208 EMERSON 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064, 0128, 0205 ENVISION 0060, 0061 ERRES 0213, 0217 ESA 0080 ETRON 0208 EURO-FEEL 0206 EUROLINE 0217 EUROMAN 0200 EUROMANN 0206, 0207, 0213 EUROPHON 0200, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215 FENNER 0208 FERGUSON 0212, 0217, 0226 FIDELITY 0200, 0207, 0210 FINLANDIA 0210 FINLUX 0204, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217 FIRSTLINE 0200, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214 FISHER 0064, 0127, 0128, 0205, 0207, 0215 FLINT 0213, 0218 FORMENTI 0200, 0205, 0207, 0215, 0217 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0200 FORTRESS 0205 FRONTECH 0206, 0208, 0210, 0211, 0214 FUJITSU 0023, 0024, 0025, 0088, 0127 FUNAI 0033, 0034, 0035, 0036, 0037, 0062, 0206 DUX DYNATRON ELBE FUTURETECH 0062 0094 0208, 0215, 0218 0057, 0060, 0061, 0122, 0147 GEC 0204, 0207, 0211, 0213, 0217 GELOSO 0208, 0210, 0215 GENERAL TECHNIC 0208 GENEXXA 0209, 0211, 0213, 0218 GIBRALTER 0060 GOLDHAND 0200 GOLDSTAR 0060, 0061, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 GOODMANS 0171, 0201, 0204, 0206, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0240 GPM 0209, 0218 GRAETZ 0211 GRANADA 0204, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217 GRANDIN 0208, 0209, 0217 GRUNDIG 0128, 0130, 0222, 0236, 0255 GRUNPY 0062 HALIFAX 0200, 0206, 0207 HALLMARK 0060, 0061 HAMPTON 0200, 0207 HANSEATIC 0203, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0215, 0217 HANTAREX 0204, 0208 HARVARD 0062 HCM 0206, 0207, 0208, 0218 HIFIVOX 0216 HIGASHI 0200 HINARI 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 HISAWA 0209, 0218 HITACHI 0006, 0014, 0015, 0016, 0042, 0060, 0061, 0095, 0105, 0127, 0156, 0179, 0180, 0204, 0207, 0210, 0211, 0215, 0216, 0251 HORNYPHON 0213 HOSHAI 0209, 0218 HUANYU 0200, 0207 HYGASHI 0200, 0207 HYPER 0200, 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 HYPSON 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 ICE 0127, 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 ICES 0200, 0218 IMA 0062 IMPERIAL 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215 INDIANA 0213, 0217 INFINITY 0063 INGELEN 0211 INGERSOL 0208 GATEWAY GBC GE INNO HIT MAGNADYNE 0204, 0205, 0214, 0215, 0217 MAGNAFON 0200, 0204, 0207 MAGNAVOX 0060, 0061, 0063, 0102, 0103, 0150 MAGNUM 0206, 0208 MAJESTIC 0058 MANDOR 0206 MANESTH 0206, 0207, 0213, 0217 MARANTZ 0060, 0061, 0063, 0090, 0213, 0217 MARELLI 0205 MARK 0200, 0213, 0217 MATSUI 0204, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0217 MEDIATOR 0213, 0217 MEDION 0206, 0208 MEGATRON 0061 MELECTRONIC 0200, 0207, 0208, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217 MEMOREX 0058, 0061, 0064, 0208 MEMPHIS 0208 METZ 0205 MGA 0060, 0061 MICROMAXX 0206, 0208 MICROSTAR 0206, 0208 MINERVA 0204 MINOKA 0213 MITSUBISHI 0006, 0015, 0016, 0048, 0060, 0061, 0104, 0112, 0113, 0125, 0205, 0213 MIVAR 0200, 0201, 0202, 0203, 0204, 0207 MONTGOMERY WARD 0058 MTC 0060, 0061, 0128, 0200 MULTI SYSTEM 0217 MULTITECH 0062, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0214, 0215, 0217 MURPHY 0200, 0207 NAD 0061 NAONIS 0210 NEC 0026, 0053, 0060, 0061, 0096, 0127 NECKERMANN 0205, 0207, 0210, 0213, 0217, 0255 NEI 0213, 0217 NESCO 0214 NET-TV 0082, 0101 NEW TECH 0208, 0213 NEW WORLD 0209, 0218 NICAMAGIC 0200, 0207 NIKKAI 0200, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 NIKKO 0061 NOBLIKO 0200, 0207 NOGAMATIC 0216 NOKIA 0129, 0211 NORDMENDE 0205, 0211, 0213, 0216 NORDVISION 0217 OCEANIC 0211 OLEVIA ONCEAS ONWA ORBIT ORION 0052, 0084 0207 0062, 0218 0213 0126, 0204, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0235 ORLINE 0218 ORSOWE 0204 OSAKI 0127, 0206, 0207, 0209, 0218 OSIO 0201 OSO 0209, 0218 OSUME 0218 OTTO VERSAND 0204, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0255 PAEL 0200, 0207 PALLADIUM 0207 PANAMA 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208 PANASONIC 0006, 0007, 0063, 0073, 0074, 0097, 0110, 0114, 0137, 0141, 0151, 0162, 0165, 0186, 0204, 0211, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254 PATHE CINEMA 0200, 0203, 0207, 0212, 0215 PATHE MARCONI 0212, 0216 PAUSA 0208 PERDIO 0200 PHILCO 0060, 0061, 0063, 0128, 0205, 0214, 0215 PHILHARMONIC 0207 PHILIPS 0040, 0060, 0063, 0072, 0115, 0116, 0124, 0130, 0150, 0175, 0184, 0187, 0205, 0207, 0213, 0215, 0217, 0220, 0221, 0232, 0233, 0252, 0253 PHILIPS MAGNAVOX 0124 PHOENIX 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 PHONOLA 0200, 0205, 0213, 0217 PILOT 0060 PIONEER 0012, 0013, 0060, 0061, 0098, 0109, 0117, 0128, 0181, 0182, 0194, 0195, 0211, 0213, 0216, 0217, 0250 PLANTRON 0206, 0213 POLAROID 0075 POPPY 0208 PORTLAND 0060, 0061 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0204, 0210 PRECISION 0207 PRIMA 0208, 0211 PROFEX 0208 PROFI-TRONIC 0213 PROLINE 0213 PROSCAN 0057 PROSONIC 0200, 0207, 0217 PROTECH 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 PROTON 0060, 0061 PROVIEW 0050 PROVISION 0217 PULSAR 0060 PYE 0213, 0217 PYMI 0208 QUASAR 0152, 0214 QUELLE 0201, 0206, 0207, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 RADIALVA 0218 RADIO SHACK 0064 RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC 0057, 0060, 0061, 0062, 0064 RADIOLA 0213, 0217 RADIOMARELLI 0204, 0205, 0214 RADIOTONE 0213 RCA 0057, 0060, 0061, 0091, 0133, 0135, 0147, 0149 REALISTIC 0064 REVOX 0213, 0217 REX 0206, 0210, 0211 RFT 0203, 0205 RHAPSODY 0200 R-LINE 0213, 0217 ROADSTAR 0206, 0208, 0209, 0218, 0237 ROBOTRON 0205 ROWA 0200 RTF 0205 SABA 0204, 0205, 0211, 0216 SACCS 0212 SAISHO 0204, 0206, 0207, 0208 SALORA 0201, 0204, 0210, 0211, 0215 SAMBERS 0204 SAMPO 0060, 0061, 0083, 0101 SAMSUNG 0029, 0030, 0031, 0032, 0044, 0045, 0046, 0047, 0060, 0061, 0065, 0068, 0069, 0071, 0079, 0087, 0127, 0128, 0130, 0144, 0160, 0161, 0170, 0176, 0183, 0185, 0200, 0201, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217, 0239, 0241, 0242, 0243 SANDRA 0200, 0207 SANSUI 0123, 0126, 0213 SANYO 0020, 0021, 0022, 0049, 0060, 0064, 0127, 0128, 0200, 0203, 0207, 0215 SBR 0217 SCHAUB LORENTZ 0211 SCHNEIDER 0207, 0209, 0213, 0215, 0216, 0217, 0218 SCOTCH 0061 SCOTT 0060, 0061, 0062 iv APPENDIX 0201, 0204, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 INNOVATION 0206, 0208 INTERBUY 0208, 0214 INTERFUNK 0205, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0216, 0217 INTERNATIONAL 0200 INTERVISION 0206, 0207, 0218 IRRADIO 0201, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 ISUKAI 0209, 0218 ITC 0207, 0215 ITS 0200, 0209, 0213, 0218 ITT 0129, 0208, 0211 ITV 0208, 0217 JBL 0063 JC PENNEY 0057, 0060, 0061 JCB 0059 JENSEN 0060, 0061 JVC 0017, 0018, 0019, 0108, 0136, 0153, 0178, 0190, 0213, 0218 KAISUI 0200, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0218 KAMOSONIC 0207 KAMP 0200, 0207 KAPSCH 0211 KARCHER 0207, 0208, 0212, 0217 KAWASHO 0059, 0060, 0061, 0200 KENDO 0128, 0210 KENNEDY 0215 KENWOOD 0060, 0061 KINGSLEY 0200, 0207 KLOSS NOVABEAM 0062 KNEISSEL 0203 KOLSTER 0213 KONKA 0209, 0218 KORPEL 0213, 0217 KORTING 0205 KOYODA 0208 KTV 0062, 0127, 0207 KYOTO 0200, 0212 LENCO 0208 LENOIR 0207, 0208 LESA 0214 LEYCO 0206, 0213, 0217 LG 0016, 0038, 0039, 0127, 0128, 0157, 0158, 0163, 0164, 0166, 0188, 0189, 0200, 0201, 0207, 0208, 0210, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 LIESENK 0217 LIFE 0206, 0208 LIFETEC 0206, 0208, 0218 LOEWE 0063, 0128, 0203, 0204, 0223, 0227 LOEWE OPTA 0205, 0213, 0217 LOGIK 0058 LUMA 0210, 0217 LUMATRON 0210, 0213, 0217 LUX MAY 0213 LUXMAN 0060, 0061 LUXOR 0201, 0207, 0210 LXI 0057, 0061, 0063, 0064 MAG 0050 SEARS 0057, 0060, 0061, 0064 SEG 0200, 0206, 0207, 0214, 0215, 0217 SEI 0204 SEI-SINUDYNE 0204, 0205, 0211 SELECO 0210, 0211, 0215 SENCORA 0208 SENTRA 0218 SERINO 0200 SHARP 0009, 0010, 0011, 0060, 0061, 0066, 0070, 0087, 0111, 0143, 0145, 0167, 0168, 0169, 0198, 0204, 0224, 0247, 0248, 0249 SHOGUN 0060 SIAREM 0204, 0205, 0215 SICATEL 0212 SIEMENS 0255 SIERRA 0213 SIGNATURE 0058 SILVA 0200 SINGER 0205, 0214, 0215 SINUDYNE 0204, 0205, 0215, 0217 SKANTIC 0211 SOLAVOX 0211 SONOKO 0206, 0207, 0208, 0213, 0217 SONOLOR 0211 SONTEC 0213, 0217 SONY 0041, 0059, 0067, 0085, 0086, 0174, 0196, 0199, 0208, 0219, 0234 SOUND & VISION 0209, 0218 SOUNDESIGN 0060, 0061, 0062 SOUNDWAVE 0213, 0217 SSS 0060, 0062 STANDARD 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 STARLIGHT 0217 STARLITE 0062 STENWAY 0218 STERN 0210, 0211 SUNKAI 0208, 0218 SUNWOOD 0208, 0213 SUPERLA 0200, 0204, 0207 SUPERTECH 0200 SUPRA 0208 SUPREME 0059 SUSUMU 0209 SUTRON 0208 SYDNEY 0200, 0207 SYLVANIA 0060, 0061, 0063, 0080, 0134, 0142, 0148 SYMPHONIC 0062, 0080 SYSLINE 0217 SYTONG 0200 TANDY 0127, 0207, 0209, 0211, 0218 TASHIKO 0200, 0207, 0210 TATUNG 0127, 0204, 0207, 0213, 0217, 0237 TCM 0206, 0208 TEAC 0127 TEC 0207, 0208, 0214, 0215 TECHWOOD 0060, 0061 v TEKNIKA TELEAVIA TELECOR TELEFUNKEN 0058, 0060, 0061, 0062 0216 0218 0065, 0213, 0216 TELEGAZI 0218 TELETECH 0208, 0214, 0217 TELETON 0207 TELEVIDEON 0200 TENSAI 0208, 0209, 0213, 0218 TESMET 0213 TEVION 0206, 0208 TEXET 0200, 0207 THOMSON 0191, 0192, 0207, 0213, 0216, 0226 THORN 0212, 0217 TMK 0060, 0061 TOKAI 0213 TOKYO 0200, 0207 TOSHIBA 0027, 0043, 0053, 0054, 0064, 0078, 0089, 0090, 0106, 0107, 0127, 0131, 0140, 0146, 0159, 0197, 0225, 0231, 0237 TOWADA 0211, 0215 TRANSTEC 0200 TRIDENT 0204 TRISTAR 0218 TRIUMPH 0204 UHER 0211, 0213 ULTRAVOX 0200, 0205, 0207, 0214, 0215 UNITED 0217 UNIVERSUM 0127, 0128, 0129, 0201, 0206, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 UNIVOX 0212 VESTEL 0210, 0211, 0213, 0214, 0215, 0217 VEXA 0208, 0217 VICTOR 0213 VIDEOLOGIC 0200 VIDEOLOGIQUE 0200, 0207, 0209, 0218 VIDEOSAT 0214 VIDEOSYSTEM 0213 VIDEOTECHNIC 0200 VIDTECH 0060, 0061 VIEWSONIC 0076, 0077, 0092, 0099, 0172, 0173 VISIOLA 0200, 0207 VISION 0213 VORTEC 0213, 0217 VOXSON 0205, 0210, 0211, 0213 WALTHAM 0207, 0212 WARDS 0057, 0058, 0060, 0061, 0063 WATSON 0213, 0217, 0218 WATT RADIO 0200, 0207, 0212, 0215 WEGA 0205 WELTBLICK 0213, 0217 WESTON 0215 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0008, 0200, 0207, 0217 WINCOM 0055, 0056 YAMAHA YAMISHI YOKO YORX ZANUSSI ZENITH 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0005, 0060, 0061 0218 0200, 0206, 0207, 0208, 0209, 0213, 0217, 0218 0209, 0218 0210 0058, 0060, 0100, 0105, 0119, 0121, 0154 TV/DVD COMBO AIWA APEX BROKSONIC BUSH JVC PANASONIC RCA SYLVANIA THOMSON TOSHIBA 0139, 2055 0132, 2049 0138, 2060 0230, 2112 0136, 2053 0137, 2054, 0254, 2110 0133, 0135, 2050, 2051 0134, 2052 0226, 2109 0131, 2048, 0231, 2111 TV/DVD/VCR COMBO PANASONIC SAMSUNG SHARP SYLVANIA TOSHIBA 0141, 1040, 2057 0241, 1070, 2113 0143, 1028, 2059 0142, 1041, 2058 0140, 1029, 2056 TV/VCR COMBO AIWA BUSH DAEWOO 0237, 1066 0237, 1066 0155, 0238, 1038, 1067 GE 0147, 1030 GOODMANS 0240, 1069 GRUNDIG 0236, 1062 HITACHI 0156, 1039 JVC 0153, 1036 MAGNAVOX 0150, 1033 ORION 0235, 1065 PANASONIC 0151, 1034 PHILIPS 0150, 0232, 0233, 1033, 1062, 1063 QUASAR 0152, 1035 RCA 0149, 1032 ROADSTAR 0237, 1066 SAMSUNG 0144, 0239, 1027, 1068 SHARP 0145, 1028 SONY 0234, 1064 SYLVANIA 0148, 1031 TATUNG 0237, 1066 TOSHIBA 0146, 0237, 1029, 1066 ZENITH 0154, 1037 DVD/VCR COMBO JVC LG PANASONIC PHILIPS RCA 1017, 1017, 2045, 2045 1071, 2087 1020, 1072, 2040, 2105 1025, 2046 1022, 2042 SAMSUNG SHARP SONY TOSHIBA ZENITH 1021, 1021, 2041, 2104 1023, 1073, 2043, 2106 1019, 1074, 2039, 2107 1024, 1075, 2044, 2108 1026, 2047 VCR ADMIRAL 1008, 1013 ADVENTURA 1005 AIWA 1005, 1042, 1043, 1044, 1066 AKAI 1007, 1043 AKIBA 1050 AKURA 1043, 1050 ALBA 1044, 1050 AMERICAN HIGH 1004 AMSTRAD 1042 ANITECH 1050 ASA 1045, 1046 ASHA 1002, 1014 ASUKA 1042, 1045, 1046, 1050 AUDIO DYNAMICS 1000 AUDIOVOX 1003 BAIRD 1042, 1043, 1047 BASIC LINE 1044, 1050 BAUR 1046 BEAUMARK 1002, 1014 BELL & HOWELL 1001 BLAUPUNKT 1046, 1048 BROKSONIC 1012, 1013 BUSH 1044, 1050, 1066 CALIX 1003 CANDLE 1002, 1003 CANON 1004 CCE 1006 CGE 1042, 1043 CIMLINE 1044, 1050 CITIZEN 1002, 1003 COLORTYME 1000 COLT 1006 CRAIG 1002, 1003, 1006, 1014 CROWN 1050 CURTIS MATHES 1000, 1002, 1004, 1009 CYBERNEX 1002, 1014 DAEWOO 1005, 1038, 1061, 1067 DANSAI 1050 DANTAX 1044 DBX 1000 DE GRAAF 1046, 1049 DECCA 1042, 1043, 1046 DENON 1010 DIMENSIA 1009 DUAL 1043, 1046 DUMONT 1042, 1046, 1047, 1049 DYNATECH 1005 ELECTROHOME 1003 ELECTROPHONIC 1003 ELTA 1050 EMERSON KENWOOD 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043 KLH 1006 KODAK 1003, 1004 KORPEL 1050 LEYCO 1050 LG 1003, 1042, 1045, 1071 LIFETEC 1044, 1048 LLOYD'S 1005 LOEWE 1048 LOEWE OPTA 1045, 1046 LOGIK 1006, 1050 LUXOR 1047 LXI 1003 M ELECTRONIC 1042 MAGNASONIC 1047 MAGNAVOX 1004, 1018, 1033 MAGNIN 1003, 1014 MANESTH 1050 MARANTZ 1000, 1001, 1004, 1046, 1051 MARTA 1003 MATSUI 1044, 1045 MATSUSHITA 1004 MEDIATOR 1046 MEDION 1044, 1048 MEI 1004 MEMOREX 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008, 1013, 1014, 1042, 1045, 1047 MEMPHIS 1050 METZ 1048 MGA 1014 MGN TECHNOLOGY 1002, 1014 MICROMAXX 1044, 1048 MICROSTAR 1044, 1048 MIGROS 1042 MINOLTA 1010 MITSUBISHI 1011, 1042, 1046 MONTGOMERY WARD 1008 MOTOROLA 1004, 1008 MTC 1002, 1014 MULTITECH 1002, 1005, 1006, 1042, 1046, 1050 MURPHY 1042 NATIONAL 1048 NEC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1043, 1051 NECKERMANN 1043, 1046 NEI 1046 NESCO 1050 NIKKO 1003 NOBLEX 1002, 1014 NOKIA 1043, 1047 NORDMENDE 1043 OCEANIC 1042, 1043 OKANO 1044 OLYMPUS 1004 OPTIMUS 1003, 1008 ORION 1012, 1013, 1044, 1065 ORSON 1042 OSAKI 1042, 1045, 1050 OTTO VERSAND 1046 PALLADIUM 1043, 1045, 1050 PANASONIC 1004, 1020, 1034, 1040, 1048, 1054, 1072 PATHE MARCONI 1043 PENNEY 1010, 1014 PENTAX 1010, 1049 PERDIO 1042 PHILCO 1004, 1051 PHILIPS 1004, 1025, 1033, 1046, 1056, 1057, 1059, 1062, 1063 PHILIPS MAGNAVOX 1018 PHONOLA 1046 PILOT 1003 PIONEER 1011, 1046 PRINZ 1042 PROFEX 1050 PROFITRONIC 1014 PROLINE 1042 PROSCAN 1009 PROSONIC 1044 PROTEC 1006 PYE 1046, 1056 QUARTER 1001 QUARTZ 1001, 1047 QUASAR 1004, 1035 QUELLE 1042, 1046, 1047 RADIO SHACK 1003 RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 RADIOLA 1046 RADIX 1003 RANDEX 1003 RCA 1002, 1004, 1009, 1010, 1014, 1015, 1022, 1032 REALISTIC 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1008 REX 1043 RFT 1046 ROADSTAR 1045, 1050, 1066 SABA 1043 SAISHO 1044, 1050 SALORA 1047 SAMSUNG 1002, 1014, 1021, 1027, 1052, 1068, 1070 SANKY 1008 SANSUI 1007, 1011, 1013, 1043 SANYO 1001, 1002, 1014, 1047 SBR 1046 SCHAUB LORENZ 1042, 1043, 1047 SCHNEIDER 1042, 1044, 1045, 1046, 1050 SCOTT 1012 SEARS 1001, 1003, 1004, 1010 SEG 1050 SEI-SINUDYNE 1046 SELECO 1043 SENTRON 1050 SHARP 1008, 1023, 1028, 1053, 1073 SHINTOM 1006, 1047, 1050 SHIVAKI 1045 SHOGUN 1002, 1014 SIEMENS 1045, 1047 SIGNATURE 2000 1008 SILVA 1045 SINGER 1004, 1006 SINUDYNE 1046 SONTEC 1045 SONY 1016, 1019, 1055, 1060, 1064, 1074 STS 1004, 1010 SUNKAI 1044 SUNSTAR 1042 SUNTRONIC 1042 SUNWOOD 1050 SYLVANIA 1004, 1005, 1031, 1041 SYMPHONIC 1005 TAISHO 1044 TANDY 1001 TASHIKO 1003, 1042 TATUNG 1007, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1066 TCM 1044, 1048 TEAC 1005, 1007 TECHNICS 1004, 1048 TEKNIKA 1003, 1004, 1005 TELEAVIA 1043 TELEFUNKEN 1043 TENOSAL 1050 TENSAI 1042, 1045, 1050 TEVION 1044, 1048 THOMSON 1043, 1058 THORN 1043, 1047 TMK 1002, 1014 TOKAI 1045, 1050 TONSAI 1050 TOSHIBA 1013, 1024, 1029, 1043, 1046, 1066, 1075 TOTEVISION 1002, 1003, 1014 TOWADA 1050 TOWIKA 1050 UHER 1045 UNITECH 1002, 1014 UNIVERSUM 1042, 1045, 1046 VECTOR RESEARCH 1000 VIDEO CONCEPTS 1000 VIDEON 1044, 1048 VIDEOSONIC 1002, 1014 WARDS 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1014 WELTBLICK 1045 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 1013 XR-1000 1004, 1005, 1006 YAMAHA 1000, 1001, 1007 YAMISHI 1050 YOKAN 1050 YOKO 1045, 1050 ZENITH 1013, 1026, 1037 DVD ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 2078 AIWA 2055, 2100 AKAI 2096 AKURA 2076 ALBA 2078, 2086 APEX 2027, 2049 AWA 2078 vi APPENDIX 1003, 1004, 1005, 1012, 1013 ETZUKO 1050 FERGUSON 1043 FIDELITY 1042 FINLANDIA 1046, 1047, 1049 FINLUX 1042, 1043, 1046, 1047, 1049 FIRST LINE 1044, 1045, 1049, 1050 FISHER 1001, 1047 FLINT 1044 FORMENTI/PHOENIX 1046 FUJI 1004 FUJITSU 1042 FUNAI 1005, 1042 GALAXY 1042 GARRARD 1005 GBC 1050 GE 1002, 1004, 1009, 1014, 1030 GEC 1046 GELOSO 1050 GENERAL TECHNIC 1044, 1048 GO VIDEO 1014 GOLDHAND 1050 GOLDSTAR 1000, 1003, 1042, 1045 GOODMANS 1042, 1045, 1050, 1069 GRADIENTE 1005 GRAETZ 1043, 1047 GRANADA 1046, 1047, 1049 GRANDIN 1042, 1045, 1050 GRUNDIG 1046, 1050, 1062 HANSEATIC 1045, 1046 HARLEY DAVIDSON 1005 HARMAN/KARDON 1000 HARWOOD 1006 HCM 1050 HEADQUARTER 1001 HINARI 1044, 1050 HISAWA 1044 HITACHI 1007, 1010, 1039, 1042, 1043, 1046, 1049 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 1010 HYPSON 1044, 1050 IMPERIAL 1042 INNO HIT 1046, 1050 INNOVATION 1044, 1048 INSTANT REPLAY 1004 INTERBUY 1045 INTERFUNK 1046, 1047 INTERVISION 1042 IRRADIO 1045, 1050 ITT 1043, 1047 ITV 1045 JC PENNEY 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1006 JCL 1004 JENSEN 1007 JVC 1000, 1001, 1007, 1011, 1017, 1036, 1043 KAISUI 1050 KARCHER 1046 KENDO 1044 01EN_HTR-6030_U_cv-4.fm Page vii Tuesday, December 19, 2006 11:14 AM AXION BRAINWAVE BRANDT BROKSONIC BUSH CENTREX CLASSIC CLATRONIC COBY C-TECH CYBERHOME 2078 2096 2073, 2085 2060 2075, 2078, 2112 2077 2078 2075 2078 2074 2025, 2079, 2091 DAEWOO 2092, 2098 DANSAI 2096 DAYTEK 2080, 2089 DEC 2075 DENON 2030, 2102, 2103 DENVER 2075, 2076 DIAMOND 2074 DK DIGITAL 2094 DUAL 2078 D-VISION 2096 DVX 2074 ELTA 2096 EUROLINE 2096 FUNAI 2052, 2058 GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 2074 GLOBAL SPHERE 2074 GOODMANS 2075, 2077, 2078 GRUNDIG 2077, 2098 H&B 2075 HAAZ 2074 HE 2078 HITACHI 2032, 2072 HOME ELECTRONICS 2078 INNOVATION 2072 IRRADIO 2134 JDB 2078 JVC 2033, 2045, 2053, 2073, 2099 KENWOOD 2030, 2097 KINGAVON 2075 KODA 2075 LAWSON 2074 LENCO 2075 LG 2084, 2087 LIFETEC 2072 LIMIT 2074 LOGICLAB 2074 LUXOR 2077 MAGNAVOX 2037, 2073, 2075 MAGNUM 2072 MBO 2078 MEDION 2072 MICROMAXX 2072 MICROMEDIA 2073 MICROSTAR 2072 MITSUBISHI 2035 MIZUDA 2075 MUSTEK 2078 NAIKO 2077 ONKYO 2073, 2135 ORAVA P&B PACIFIC PANASONIC 2075 2075 2074 2030, 2040, 2054, 2057, 2105, 2110 PHILIPS 2019, 2026, 2046, 2073, 2081, 2090 PIONEER 2036, 2082 PROLINE 2077 PROVISION 2075 RCA 2031, 2042, 2050, 2051 RED STAR 2076 REOC 2074 ROADSTAR 2075, 2078, 2086 ROWA 2077 SABA 2085 SABAKI 2074 SAMSUNG 2032, 2041, 2104, 2113 SANSUI 2074 SANYO 2095 SCANMAGIC 2078 SCIENTIFIC LABS 2074 SCOTT 2088 SEG 2074, 2086 SHARP 2034, 2043, 2059, 2093, 2106 SILVA 2076 SINGER 2074 SKYMASTER 2074, 2078 SKYWORTH 2076 SM ELECTRONIC 2074, 2078 SONY 2028, 2029, 2039, 2083, 2107 SOUNDMASTER 2074 SOUNDMAX 2074 STANDARD 2074 STAR CLUSTER 2074 STARMEDIA 2075 SUPERVISION 2074, 2078 SYLVANIA 2052, 2058 SYNN 2074 TCM 2072 TEAC 2074 TEC 2076 TECHNICS 2030 TECHNIKA 2096 TECHNOSONIC 2096 TEVION 2072, 2074 THOMSON 2085, 2109 TOKAI 2076 TOSHIBA 2026, 2044, 2048, 2056, 2073, 2108, 2111 UNITED 2078 VOXSON 2078 WHARFEDALE 2074 XLOGIC 2074 YAKUMO 2077 YAMADA YAMAHA YUKAI ZENITH 2077 2000, 2001, 2003, 2030, 2101 2078 2038, 2047, 2073 DVD-DVR PANASONIC PIONEER SAMSUNG TOSHIBA 2067 2114 2115 2068 DVD/LD COMBO PIONEER 2036 DVD RECORDER APEX JVC LG PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER RCA SONY TOSHIBA YAMAHA YUKAI 2024 2070 2071 2020, 2065, 2066, 2067 2019, 2061, 2062, 2063 2021 2018 2022, 2064 2068 2023 2069 NIVEUS MEDIA 2132 NORTHGATE 2132 PANASONIC 2015, 2016, 2017, 2120 PHILIPS 2117, 2121, 2123, 2128 PIONEER 2012, 2013, 2014 PROSCAN 2129 RCA 2116, 2124, 2129, 2133 REPLAYTV 2118, 2119, 2120 SHARP 2009, 2010 SONIC BLUE 2119, 2120 SONY 2005, 2006, 2007, 2122, 2130, 2131, 2132 STACK 9 2132 SYSTEMAX 2132 TAGAR SYSTEMS 2132 TIVO 2116, 2121, 2122, 2123, 2130, 2131 TOSHIBA 2004, 2125, 2132 TOUCH 2132 ULTIMATETV 2133 VIEWSONIC 2132 VOODOO 2132 YAMAHA 2011 ZT GROUP 2132 LD PLAYER YAMAHA 2002 DVR ABS 2132 ALIENWARE 2132 CYBERPOWER 2132 DELL 2132 DIRECTV 2123, 2128, 2129, 2133 DISH NETWORK 2126, 2127 DISHPRO 2126 ECHOSTAR 2126, 2127 EXPRESSVU 2126 GATEWAY 2132 GOI 2126 HEWLETT PACKARD 2132 HITACHI 2008 HOWARD COMPUTERS 2132 HTS 2126 HUGHES 2123, 2128 HUMAX 2123 HUSH 2132 IBUYPOWER 2132 JVC 2126, 2127 LINKSYS 2132 MEDIA CENTER PC 2132 MICROSOFT 2132 MIND 2132 © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA CD PLAYER YAMAHA 5000, 5013 CD RECORDER YAMAHA 5001 MD YAMAHA 5002, 5003, 5004 TAPE DECK YAMAHA 5005, 5006 TUNER YAMAHA 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, 5012, 5014 OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 5011 All rights reserved. Printed in China WJ63840 00_Sheet_HTR-6030_U.book Page 1 Thursday, December 28, 2006 10:19 AM U HTR-6030 The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual. ■ Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VOLUME STANDBY /ON EDIT SEARCH MODE PRESET/TUNING CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY DISPLAY TUNING AUTO/MAN'L SCENE 1 l PHONES SPEAKERS A/B/OFF PROGRAM TONE CONTROL 2 3 STRAIGHT NIGHT h 4 l INPUT VIDEO AUX h AUDIO SELECT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 9 0 A B C D E F VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE 00_Sheet_HTR-6030_U.book Page i Thursday, December 28, 2006 10:19 AM ■ Remote control X A B C POWER POWER TV AV MULTI CH IN STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP MUTE CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD DTV/CBL DVR TV CH V-AUX XM AMP TV INPUT TV MUTE TV VOL L M N O D E F SCENE 1 BAND LEVEL TITLE G H 2 3 4 SRCH MODE VOLUME MENU Q ENTER RETURN XM MEMORY P R DISPLAY REC I J K l PROG h 1 2 ENHANCER STRAIGHT 3 4 8 SUR.DECODE NIGHT 5 6 7 9 0 10 ENT. S T U V W Printed in China WK14310